Portugues
An Essential Grammar
Amelia P. Hutchinson and Janet Lloyd
Also available as a printed book
see title verso for ISBN details
Portuguese
An Essential Grammar
Second Edition
This new edition of Portuguese: An Essential Grammar is a practical refer-
ence guide to the most important aspects of modern Portuguese.
It presents a fresh and accessible description of the language that combines
traditional and function-based grammar. The book sets out the complex-
ities of Portuguese in short, readable sections. Explanations are clear and
free from jargon. Throughout, the emphasis is on Portuguese as used by
native speakers around the world.
The Grammar is the ideal reference source for the learner and user of
Portuguese. It is suitable for either independent study or for students in
schools, colleges, universities and adult classes of all types.
This second edition features:
• Coverage of both European and Brazilian Portuguese and information
on the lexical differences between the two
• Detailed contents list and index for easy access to information
• Full use of authentic examples
• Coverage of traditional grammar and language functions
• New section on the history and culture of the Portuguese-speaking
world
Amelia P. Hutchinson is Supervisor for Portuguese Language at the
University of Georgia and Janet Lloyd is Lecturer in Portuguese and
Spanish at the University of Salford.
Routledge Essential Grammars
Essential Grammars are available for the following languages:
Chinese
Danish
Dutch
English
Finnish
Modern Hebrew
Norwegian
Polish
Portuguese
Swedish
Urdu
Other titles of related interest published by Routledge:
Colloquial Portuguese
By Joao Sampaio and Barbara Mclntyre
Colloquial Portuguese of Brazil
By Esmenia Simdes Osborne, Joao Sampaio and Barbara Mclntyre
Portuguese
An Essential Grammar
Second Edition
Amelia R Hutchinson and
Janet Lloyd
O Routledge
Taylor &. Francis Group
NEW YORK AND LONDON
First edition published 1996
by Routledge
29 West 35th Street, New York, NY 1 000 1
Simultaneously published in the UK
by Routledge
I I New Fetter Lane, London EC4P 4EE
Reprinted 1997, 1999,2000,2002
Second edition published 2003 by Routledge
Routledge is an imprint of the Taylor & Francis Group
© 2003 Amelia P. Hutchinson and Janet Lloyd
This edition published in theTaylor & Francis e- Library, 2006.
"To purchase your own copy of this or any of Taylor & Francis or Routledge's
collection of thousands of eBooks please go to www.eBookstore.tandf.co.uk."
All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reprinted or
reproduced or utilised in any form or by any electronic, mechanical,
or other means, now known or hereafter invented, including
photocopying and recording, or in any information storage or
retrieval system, without permission in writing from the publishers.
British Library Cataloguing in Publication Data
A catalogue record for this book is available from the British Library.
Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data
Hutchinson, Amelia P., 1 949—
Portuguese: an essential grammar/Amelia P. Hutchinson and
Janet Lloyd. - 2nd ed.
p. cm. - (Routledge essential grammars)
Includes bibliographical references and index.
I . Portuguese language - Grammar. 2. Portuguese language -
Textbooks for foreign speakers - English. I. Lloyd, Janet, 1 968—
II. Title. III. Series.
PC5067.3.H88 2003
469.82'42 1 -dc2 1 2003005266
ISBN 0-203-42656-8 Master e-book ISBN
ISBN 0-203-44077-3 (Adobe eReader Format)
isbn 0-415-30816-x (hbk) (Print Edition)
Foreword to first edition xiv
Acknowledgments xvi
Foreword to second edition xviii
How to use this book xx
PART I: AN ESSENTIAL GRAMMAR I
Chapter I Pronunciation and spelling 3
1.1 Vowels 3
1.2 Consonants 4
1.3 Diphthongs 6
1.4 Stress 7
1.5 Accents 8
Chapter 2 Nouns 9
2.1 Gender I: masculine and feminine 9
2.2 Gender II: forming the feminine 11
2.3 Number: forming the plural 15
2.4 Diminutives and augmentatives 18
2.5 Compound nouns 21
2.6 Collective nouns 22
Chapter 3 Articles 24
3.1 Definite article 24
3.2 Use of the definite article 24
3.3 Omission of the definite article 25
3.4 Contraction of the definite article 27
3.5 Indefinite article 28
3.6 Use of the indefinite article 29
3.7 Omission of the indefinite article 30
3.8 Contraction of the indefinite article 30
Chapter 4 Adjectives 32
4.1 Gender 32
4.2 Number 34
4.3 Degree 36
4.4 Agreement 40
4.5 Position in the sentence 41
Chapter 5 Pronouns 43
5.1 Personal pronouns 43
5.2 Possessive pronouns and adjectives 53
5.3 Demonstrative pronouns 55
5.4 Relative pronouns 57
5.5 Interrogative pronouns 60
5.6 Indefinite pronouns and adjectives 62
Chapter 6 Numerals 64
6.1 Cardinal, ordinal and multiplicative numbers 64
6.2 Collective numerals 66
6.3 Use of the conjunction e with numerals 66
6.4 Roman numerals 67
Chapter 7 Verbs 68
7.1 Moods and tenses 68
7.2 Indicative mood 69
7.3 Subjunctive mood 82
7.4 Imperative mood 90
7.5 Infinitive 91
7.6 Present participle 93
7.7 Compound infinitive and compound present
participle 94
7.8 Past participle 94
7.9 Passive voice 95
7.10 Auxiliary verbs 98
7.11 Impersonal, unipersonal and defective verbs 103
7.12 Reflexive verbs 104
7.13 Changing vowel sounds in verbal conjugation 106
Chapter 8 Adverbs 1 07
8 . 1 Uses of the adverb 107
8.2 Adverbs in -mente 108
8.3 Other adverbs 109
8.4 Position 109
8.5 Degree 110
Chapter 9 Conjunctions I I I
9.1 Co-ordinating conjunctions 111
9.2 Subordinating conjunctions 113
Chapter 10 Prepositions I 16
10.1 Most commonly used prepositions 116
10.2 Prepositional phrases 116
10.3 Contraction of preposition + article or pronoun 117
10.4 Verbs followed by a preposition 117
Chapter I I Additional notes on Portuguese usage I 19
11.1 Gente/agente 119
11.2 Tudo/todo 119
11.3 Por/para 120
11.4 A/para 121
11.5 Desde . . . ate/de . . . a 121
11.6 Proximo/seguinte 122
11.7 Tao/tanto 122
11.8 Affirmative/negative 123
11.9 Ainda/ja 123
11.10 Prepositions of time 124
11.11 Prepositions with means of transport 124
11.12 Word order 125
11.13 Ser/estar 128
PART II: LANGUAGE FUNCTIONS
Chapter 12 Socializing
12.1 General greetings
12.2 Taking leave
12.3 Greeting/taking leave according to time of day
12.4 Attracting attention
12.5 Seasonal greetings
12.6 Personal greetings
12.7 Congratulations
12.8 Good wishes
12.9 Introductions
12.10 Forms of address
12.11 Talking about one's health
12.12 Places and locations
12.13 Talking about the weather
131
133
133
134
135
136
138
138
138
139
139
140
144
146
148
Chapter 13 Exchanging factual information 151
13.1 Identifying people 151
13.2 Identifying things 154
13.3 Asking for information 155
13.4 Reporting, describing and narrating 157
13.5 Letter writing 160
13.6 Correcting assumptions 163
Chapter 1 4 Getting things done 1 65
14.1 Suggesting a course of action 165
14.2 Offering to do something 166
14.3 Requesting others to do something 166
14.4 Inviting others to do something 167
14.5 Asking for and giving advice 167
14.6 Warning others 168
14.7 Instructing others to do/not to do something 169
14.8 Requesting assistance 170
14.9 Stating and finding out whether something is
compulsory 171
14.10 Seeking, giving, refusing permission 172
14.11 Expressing and finding out about need
14.12 Enquiring and expressing intention, want or desire
172
173
Chapter 1 5 Finding out and expressing intellectual
attitudes 1 75
15.1 Agreement and disagreement 175
15.2 Knowing something or someone 177
15.3 Remembering something or someone 178
15.4 Possibility and impossibility 179
15.5 Logical conclusions 181
15.6 Incomprehension and clarification 182
15.7 Certainty and uncertainty 183
Chapter 16 Judgement and evaluation 185
16.1 Expressing pleasure or liking 185
16.2 Expressing displeasure or dislike 186
16.3 Enquiring about pleasure/displeasure, liking/dislike 187
16.4 Enquiring about and expressing interest/lack of
interest 188
16.5 Expressing surprise 189
16.6 Expressing hope 190
16.7 Enquiring about and expressing satisfaction/
dissatisfaction 191
16.8 Expressing disappointment 192
16.9 Enquiring about and expressing worry or fear 192
16.10 Enquiring about and expressing preference 194
16.11 Expressing gratitude 194
16.12 Expressing sympathy 195
16.13 Expressing happiness and unhappiness 196
16.14 Apologizing 196
16.15 Enquiring about and expressing approval/disapproval 197
16.16 Expressing appreciation 198
16.17 Expressing regret 199
16.18 Expressing indifference 200
16.19 Accusing 200
16.20 Enquiring about and expressing capability/
incapability 201
PART III: BRAZILIAN VARIANTS
203
Chapter 17
Brazilian essential grammar and
o
language functions
205
Chapter Bl
Pronunciation and spelling
206
Bl.l
Vowels
208
Bl.1.1
Oral vowels
208
B1.2
Consonants
209
B1.3
Diphthongs
209
Bl.3.2
Nasal diphthongs
209
Chapter B2
Nouns
210
B2.4
Diminutives and augmentatives
210
B2.4.1
Diminutives
210
B2.4.3
Preferred diminutives
210
Chapter B3
Articles
21 1
B3.2
Use of the definite article
211
B3.2.1
With first names
211
B3.2.2
With titles
211
B3.2.5
Before possessive adjectives
211
Chapter B4
Adjectives
212
B4.1.1.2
Adjectives ending in -eu
212
B4.3
Degree
212
B4.3.1
The comparative
212
B4.3.3
Special comparative and superlative forms
212
Chanter B5
Pmnnunc
213
B5.1
Personal pronouns
213
B5.1.1
Subject pronouns
213
B5.1.2
Direct object pronouns
213
B5.1.3
Indirect object pronouns
215
B5.1.5
Prepositional pronouns
215
B5.1.6
Reflexive pronouns
216
B5.2 Possessive pronouns and adjectives 216
B5.2.1 Possessive adjectives 217
B5.2.2 Possessive pronouns 217
Chapter B6 Numerals 2 1 8
B6.1 Cardinal, ordinal and multiplicative numbers 218
Chapter B7 Verbs 219
B7.4 Imperative mood 219
B7.4.1 Conjugation 219
B7.6 Present participle 219
B7.12 Reflexive verbs 219
Chapter B 1 0 Prepositions 22 1
B10.4 Verbs followed by a preposition 221
Chapter B I I Additional notes on Brazilian
Portuguese usage 222
Bll.l Gente/agente 222
B11.4 A/para 222
B 11.11 Prepositions with means of transport 222
B11.12 Word order 223
Bl 1.12.1 Pronouns and verbs 223
Bll.12.5 Adverbs 223
Chapter B 1 2 Socializing 224
B12.1 General greetings 224
B12.1.1 Informal 224
B12.2 Taking leave 224
B12.2.1 Informal 224
B12.2.2 More formal farewells, figurative 225
B12.4 Attracting attention 225
B12.4.3 Call for help 225
B12.10 Forms of address 225
B12.10.2 Less informal 226
B12.10.3 Formal 227
B12.10.4
Titles
227
B12.10.5
Family
228
B12.ll
Talking about one's health
228
B12.ll. 1
In small talk and greetings
228
B12.12.4
Place of residence and addresses
229
B12.13
Talking about the weather
229
v^napier d i j
cxcnanging Tactual inTorrnarion
lift
B13.1
Identifying people
230
B13.1.4
Profession, occupation
230
B13.3
Asking for information
230
B13.5
Letter writing
231
B13.5.1
Dates
231
B13.5.2
Opening formulas
231
VJcLLIIIg Llllllga UUIIc
B14.4
Inviting others to do something
232
B14.8
Requesting assistance
232
B14.12
Enquiring about and expressing intention,
want or desire
233
Chapter BI5
Finding out about and expressing
intellectual attitudes
234
B15.6
Incomprehension and clarification
234
B15.7
Certainty and uncertainty
234
cndpicr D 1 O
juugeiTieni chili cvaiuaLUJii
B16.2
Expressing displeasure or dislike
235
B16.5
Expressing surprise
235
B16.6
Expressing hope
235
B16.14
Apologizing
236
B16.17
Expressing regret
236
ii
PART IV: HISTORICAL AND CULTURAL NOTES 237
Chapter 18 The Portuguese language and the
cultures of the Portuguese-speaking
world 239
18.1 Portuguese: an international language 239
18.1.1 Portuguese as an official language 239
18.1.2 Variants of Portuguese 240
18.2 The origins of Portuguese 241
18.3 Portuguese: cultural expressions 243
18.3.1 Literature 243
18.3.2 Music 244
18.3.3 Cinema 248
18.4 Internet resources 251
Bibliography
Index
253
255
Foreword to the
first edition
The aim of this work is to offer the student of Portuguese a succinct and
reasonably comprehensive overview of Portuguese grammar.
We have attempted to cater for different groups of students, each with their
own needs: the beginner, who may not have an extensive knowledge of
grammatical concepts and terminology yet requires a guide through the
grammar of the language; the intermediate-advanced student, who appre-
ciates a clear reference book in moments of doubt; and the independent or
adult learner, who is studying Portuguese not for academic purposes but
with other aims in mind, such as business or travel.
Above all, we have aimed to produce a 'user-friendly' handbook with
concise explanations of areas of grammar and comprehensible examples
taken from current Portuguese usage. This latter point is significant, given
our firm belief that grammar should not stand divorced from usage.
Nevertheless, the 'essential' nature of this work means that we have been
obliged to use short illustrative phrases or sentences out of context.
We have tried to make the book as 'neutral' as possible, bearing in mind
the differences between European Portuguese, Brazilian Portuguese and the
Portuguese spoken in the Lusophone African countries. Although we have
taken European Portuguese as our starting-point, we have indicated the
most marked differences between this and Brazilian grammar and usage in
Part III. We have aimed, thus, to cover both ends of the spectrum. As
African Portuguese falls somewhere between these two extremes with diver-
gences which are more lexical than grammatical, we have decided not to
extend this work into that area.
Part II which deals with language functions was largely inspired by
National Curriculum guidelines for other languages. In this way, we
have also endeavoured to address the needs of teachers of Portuguese in
secondary education.
If, with this product of our effort, we can assist a wider range of people in
learning and developing their knowledge of Portuguese, the eighth most
spoken language in the world, we will consider ourselves well rewarded.
We are grateful to many colleagues for their advice and assistance (and, in
some cases, patience) in the writing of this book. Our sincere thanks go to
members of the Spanish and Portuguese section of the Department of
Modern Languages, University of Salford, and especially to Professor Leo
Hickey, for his observations, which helped us to avoid many glaring
mistakes; to Mr Malcolm Marsh for his advice on how to illustrate pronun-
ciation and to Ms Cristina Sousa, for her helpful comments regarding
language functions. We would also like to single out Mr Mike Harland of
the University of Glasgow for his very welcome encouragement and Mr
Carlos Sachs of the University of Manchester for his advice on Brazilian
Portuguese usage.
Our thanks also go to Mr Peter Bull of William Hulme's Grammar School,
Manchester, and Mr Neville Mars of St Edward's College, Liverpool for
their support in this venture. Likewise, we are also grateful to Dr John Rae,
Director of the Enterprise in Higher Education Unit of the University of
Salford, and Mr Andrew Hollis of the Department of Modern Languages,
University of Salford.
Many more people, British students of Portuguese and Portuguese post-
graduate students of the University of Salford, offered their kind and
enthusiastic support in the form of suggested examples or spontaneous
comments frequently elicited by our dynamic collaborator, Maria Jose
Azevedo Silva, whose role was of intrinsic value during the earlier stages
of this project, the work having been initiated by Rute Franco Camacho.
Obviously, we could not overlook the contribution of our students, who,
over the years, have offered themselves as guinea pigs and their comments
have always been most welcome.
Despite the care that has gone into producing this book, there are, no doubt,
errors, oversights and inaccuracies for which we take full responsibility.
Amelia P. Hutchinson
Janet Lloyd
Salford, 1996
xvii
Foreword to the
second edition
The authors would like to express their pleasure at the success that this
practical book has enjoyed in many universities, mainly in the UK and the
USA, where it has been integrated into the syllabus of Portuguese language
courses. We are most grateful for the comments and advice offered by
colleagues for whom our volume has become a useful teaching-and-
learning tool. In order not to outdate notes and handouts already prepared
by teachers of Portuguese, we have not altered the numbering of sections
although new items have been added.
We have thoroughly revised all the examples used in the various sections
of the book and attempted to make them all acceptable in Brazilian and
European Portuguese, in order to facilitate their use by readers interested
in any of the variants of Portuguese. Whenever necessary, we added notes
specific to Brazilian Portuguese in Part III. Our objective is to lead the
reader or new learner to develop a 'mid-Atlantic' command of Portuguese
that can be used anywhere in the Portuguese-speaking world. Any speaker
can have control over the variant of Portuguese that he/she wishes to use,
but that control cannot be exercised over their interlocutors, hence the need
to be prepared to meet the challenges posed by speakers from all corners
of the Portuguese diaspora. We have also improved the translation of many
examples.
We have added Part IV, which contains cultural notes on the origins
of Portuguese, its role as an international language, and its use in forms of
artistic expression such as literature, music and film. These notes are far
from being extensive. Their objective is merely to offer the reader a taster
of Portuguese as a living language, and an instrument of linguistic and
artistic communication for nearly two hundred million native speakers
scattered around the world. In all other regards, our objectives are the same
as stated in the first edition.
For this second revised edition, the authors have benefited from the assist-
ance of Viviane Martines Riitano, a native speaker of Brazilian Portuguese
who made a valuable contribution towards the thorough revision of this
volume, and the section on Musica Popular Brasileira or MPB, in Part IV.
Our logistics have become considerably complicated since our first edition.
Janet Lloyd is still working at the University of Salford, UK, where she is
Director of Undergraduate Studies in the School of Languages. Viviane
Riitano teaches Portuguese at the University of Birmingham, UK, and
Amelia P. Hutchinson is now Supervisor for Portuguese Language at the
University of Georgia, Athens, GA, USA. It was only the team spirit that
we all share and the progress of technology that made our work possible.
Finally, a word of thanks to Sophie Oliver, our editor, for her enthusiasm,
patience and understanding, giving a large publishing house like Routledge
a human dimension that made our work a pleasure to accomplish.
Amelia P. Hutchinson
Janet Lloyd
19 January 2003
How to use this book
Part I covers the fundamental aspects of Portuguese grammar and is
intended for reference and illustrative use.
Part II covers a wide range of language functions to assist students in
putting grammar into context. In this part, our aim was to present a series
of short, self-contained dialogues which not only illustrate language func-
tions but also provide the student and the teacher with useful source texts.
The dialogues may be developed in a number of ways, of which we suggest:
(a) role-play;
(b) a starting-point for development of narrative skills;
(c) grammatical analysis;
(d) comprehension exercises.
As we have tried as far as possible to use everyday Portuguese situations
in the dialogues, we hope that they may also provide useful cultural refer-
ences.
Part III presents the main variants of Brazilian Portuguese. Entries in this
section carry the prefix 'B' and correspond to chapter and section numbers
in Parts I and II. In these parts, superscript capital B indicates a Brazilian
variant which can be found in Part III.
Most words in the Index are grammatically classified and it is intended as
a learning tool. We hope that students who regularly consult the Index will
gradually become accustomed to certain grammatical terms, thus finding
that explanations in the book become progressively clearer.
PART I
An essential gramm
Chapter I
Pronunciation and spelling
This chapter offers a pronunciation guide to European Portuguese with
examples of similar sounds in English. Wherever possible, we have attempt-
ed to provide close equivalent sounds in English but where this has proved
impossible, we offer approximate equivalents.
I.I
/././
Vowels
Oral vowels
Example
Pronounced as
open a
sapoto
fat
closed a
sopato
about
unstressed a
boco
announce
open e
cheque
cheque
closed e
cabelo
fill
unstressed e B
cheque
bake
as conjunction, or
as first syllable of word B
• I
elefante J
eel
f/ta
feet
open o
loja
lozenge
closed o
poco
torso
unstressed o
poco
zoo (approximate)
luta
loot
1 The u is silent in que, qui, gue and gui (quente, quinta, guerra, guitarra) and
pronounced in qua, quo and gua (quatro, quorum, guarda).
But there are some exceptions where the u is read: tranquilo, (tranqiiilo B in Brazilian
Portuguese).
Note: An acute accent over a vowel means that it is 'open' (e.g. la, pe, avo),
whereas a circumflex accent means that the vowel is 'closed' (e.g. le, avo).
1.1.2
Nasal vowels (produced with some nasal resonance)
A vowel is nasal if a tilde (~) is written above it or if it is followed by -m
or -n within the same syllable:
Example
Pronounced as
a
la
\amb
am
omplo
omple
an
i
pi ant a
i i
p l an kton
em
emprestimo
empower
en
entre
entertain
om
compras
competition
on
contar
contrary
im
sim
scene
in
tints.
t/nder
um
tumba 1
tomb
un
nunca J
The word muito has a unique pronunciation because the i is pronounced
as a nasal vowel.
Consonants 6
Most Portuguese consonants are
English equivalents, except for:
Example
S 1 laco
ch champ 6
g + a, o, u 2 gas
pronounced in the same way as their
Pronounced as
lace
shampoo
gash
g + e, i
gelo
measure
h
hora
(not pronounced)
J
measure
Ih
mi/hao
mi//ion
nh
vinho
on/on
q 3
quadro
quack
1 c is pronounced as in 'lace' before e and i, and as in 'cat' before a, o and u.
To be pronounced as in 'lace' before a, o and u, it must have a cedilla: q.
2 u after g is silent, when followed by e or i (e.g. gwitarra, gwerra).
3 q appears only before u. Normally, the u is silent if e or i follow (e.g. magwina).
intervocalic or final, or preceded
by a consonant (except n or I)
initial, or preceded by n or I
s
initial
intervocalic, or final if followed
by vowel
parar
compras
rabo
tenro
palrar
carro
samba
casa
metis amigos
at end of syllable/word, if followed vespa
by unvoiced consonant (t, c, f, p) mosca
fosforos
metis pais
at end of syllable/word, if followed Lisboa
by voiced consonant has-de
(b, d, g, m, n, r) rasgar
mesmo
cisne
Israel
as maos
(rolling the V
a little more
than in
English)
robber (rolling
the V)
(as initial V)
samba
kasbah
sugar
measure
X
usual pronunciation xerife sheriff
Mexico mesh
peixe fish
excelente geisha
in words beginning with ex- exame 1
plus vowel existir > easy
exotico J
in a few words (memorize!) taxi taxi
to rax thorax
in still fewer words (memorize!) trouxe I possible
proximo J
z
initial, or intervocalic zebra zebra
dizer dessert
final luz louche
1.3
1.3.1
Diphthongs
Oral diphthongs
Example
Pronounced as
ai
pa[
pie
au
mou
power
ei
lei
\ay
eu 1
teu
phew (approximate)
iu
part/u
Europe
oi
foi
'oyV
ou
sou
though
ui
Lou/siana (with more emphasis on the V)
1 When these diphthongs carry an acute accent, the first vowel is pronounced with
its equivalent open sound (see 1.1.1), e.g. papeis, chapeu, sois.
1.3.2 Nasal diphthongs*
When pronouncing the examples below, it is important to remember that
the £ n' in the corresponding English words is not sounded. Imagine saying
the words when you have a blocked nose and you will be close!
Example
Pronounced as
ae
mere
main (approx.)
ai
co/bra
Cain (approx.)
ao
poo
pound (but more nasal)
■am
am am
mound (but more nasal)
-em, -en(s)
sem
saint (approx.)
parabens
chain (approx.)
6e
poe
boing (approx.)
Stress
Portuguese words are normally stressed on the penultimate syllable, or on
the final syllable if ending in -r, -1, -z or -u. In these cases, the accent is not
required:
do-cu-men-to
document
ve-/y-do
velvet
pro-fes-sor
teacher
ti-ror
take
co-mer
eat
par-t/r
break
pa-pef
paper
a-zu/
blue
ca-poz
capable
fe-//z
happy
pe-ru
turkey
But whenever the stress falls on the antepenultimate or the last syllable,
other than in the cases indicated above, the word has to take an accent:
u/-ti-mo last
cha-mi-ne chimney
\v -ma sister
fy-til futile
mo-vel piece of furniture/mobile
Accents
In Portuguese there are four accents:
acute accent (opens the vowel): agua
A circumflex accent (closes the vowel): Zezere
~ tilde (nasalizes the vowel): irma
grave accent (used only when there is a contraction of the
preposition a with an article or pronoun): a, aquilo (a + a = a;
a + aquilo = aquilo)
The accent is also used:
(a) to distinguish different words:
pelo by pelo fur; body hair
ma?a mace maca apple
pela by, for, through pela ball
(b) to distinguish verbal forms:
compramos we buy compramos we bought
Note: The Brazilian variant takes no accent on the verbs with the same
spelling but different tenses. Even the pronunciation is kept the same.
Chapter 2
Nouns
Gender I: masculine and feminine
There are two genders: masculine and feminine. The gender of a noun is
determined by its ending, its meaning or its origin.
Note: When you learn new words, always make sure you learn their
genders! Learn them together with the appropriate definite article.
2.1.1 The masculine gender is normally used for male persons, animals
and professions commonly assigned to males. Most nouns ending in -o,
-1, -r and -z are masculine:
o pato duck o colar necklace
o papel paper o jufz judge
2. 1 . 1 . 1 Also masculine are:
Names of oceans, seas, rivers, lakes, capes and mountain ranges
o Atlantico the Atlantic o Lucerna Lake Lucerne
o Baltico the Baltic o Finisterra Cape Finisterre
o Tejo the Tagus os Himalaias the Himalayas
Wines
o Porto Port o Dao Dao
Cars
o Ferrari Ferrari o Rover Rover
• Names of seasons
o Verao Summer
o Outono Autumn
o Inverno Winter
But a Primavera Spring
• Names of letters: o 'a'; o 'p'
• Cardinal numbers: o urn; o duzentos 'one; two hundred'
But the gender of ordinal numbers agrees with that of the noun they corres-
pond to:
minuto
dia
o primeiro mes
ano
seculo
a primeira hora
a primeira semana
Words of Greek origin ending in -a
o telegrama telegram o clima
o mapa map o telefonema
o cinema cinema
the first
the first hour
the first week
minute
day
month
year
century
climate
phone call
2. 1.2 The feminine gender is normally used for female persons, animals
and professions commonly assigned to females. Most nouns ending in -a,
-a, -ade, -ice and -gem are feminine:
a panela pot a velhice old age
a irma sister a viagem journey
a verdade truth
But do not forget that there are some words that end in -a and are mascu-
line! (See above, 2.1.1.1.)
2.1.2.1 Also feminine are:
• Names of sciences and arts
a Medicina Medicine
a Matematica Mathematics
But o Teatro and o Cinema
• Days of the week
a segunda-feira Monday
a ter^a-feira Tuesday
a quarta-feira Wednesday
But o sabado Saturday
o domingo Sunday
a Pintura Painting
a Musica Music
a quinta-feira Thursday
a sexta-feira Friday
2. 1.3 Most concrete nouns ending in -e and -ao are masculine:
o leite milk o limao lemon
But a mao hand
2. 1.4 Abstract nouns ending in -e and -ao are feminine:
a morte death a paixao passion
Gender II: forming the feminine
Nouns ending in
Add
Change into
-o
-a
consonant
-a
-or
-a
-or
-triz
-or
-eira
-eu
-eia
-ao
-a
-ao
-oa
-ao
-ona
2.2.1 Most nouns ending in -o form their feminine by changing this
ending into -a:
o tio a tia uncle aunt
2.2.2 Most nouns ending in a consonant or -or form their feminine by
adding an -a:
o portugues a portuguesa Portuguese man/woman
o cantor a cantora singer
But there are two exceptions! See 2.2.2.1 and 2.2.2.2.
2.2.2.1 Nouns ending in -or can change into -triz (fern.):
o actor a actriz actor actress
o embaixador a embaixatriz 1 ambassador ambassadress
1 Embaixatriz is the wife of the ambassador; but if the ambassador is a woman,
she is an embaixadora.
2.2.2.2
Nouns ending in -or can also change into -eira:
o lavrador a lavradeira farmer
2.2.3 Nouns ending in -eu form their feminine by changing into -eia:
o europeu a europeia B the European
2.2.4
Nouns ending in -ao form their feminine by changing into -a, -oa
or -ona:
o anao a ana dwarf
o leao a leoa lion lioness
o solteirao a solteirona bachelor spinster
But o barao a baronesa baron baroness
2.2.5 Some nouns have different endings for their masculine and
feminine forms:
o consul a consulesa consul
o heroi a heroina hero
o poeta a poetisa poet
heroine
poetess
2.2.6 Some nouns have a common form for both genders.
2.2.6. 1 The only thing that varies is the article:
\J UUCIIlC
& UUCII I.C
panel it
o jovem
a jovem
youth
o artista
a artista
artist
o presidente
a presidente
president
o concorrente
a concorrente
competitor/contestant
o interprete
a interprete
interpreter
o colega
a colega
colleague
o estudante
a estudante
student
o emigrante
a emigrante
emigrant
o dentista
a dentista
dentist
o turista
a turista
tourist
o jornalista
a jornalista
journalist
o guia
a guia
guide
o ciclista
a ciclista
cyclist
2.2.6.2 The article remains the same whether it refers to male or female:
child
witness
o conjuge spouse
a cnanca
a testemunha
2.2.7 There are also pairs of words to denote male and female:
o macho
a femea
male
female
o cavalo
a egua
stallion
mare
o cao
a cadela
dog
bitch
o bode
a cabra
billy-goat
nanny-goat
o carneiro
a ovelha
ram
ewe
o boi
a vaca
ox
cow
o galo
a galinha
cockerel,
hen
rooster
o rapaz
a rapariga/
a moca B
boy
girl
o homem
a mulher
man
woman
o marido
a esposa
husband
wife
o pai
a mae
father
mother
o padrasto
a madrasta
stepfather
stepmother
o padrinho
a madrinha
godfather
godmother
o genro
a nora
son-in-law
daughter-in-law
o avo
a avo
grandfather
grandmother
o rei
a rain ha
king
queen
2.2.8 Some nouns referring to animals have a fixed form and gender
regardless of the animal's sex:
o abutre vulture a formiga ant
o rouxinol nightingale a foca seal
o tigre tiger a raposa fox
o bufalo buffalo a cobra snake
o antilope antilope a zebra zebra
2.2.8.1 When it is necessary to indicate the sex of these animals, the
Portuguese equivalent to male (macho) and female (femea) should be used:
o abutre femea or a femea do abutre female vulture
a foca macho or o macho da foca male seal
Note: Adjectives qualifying these nouns agree with the gender of the noun
and not with the gender of the animal:
um bonito tigre femea a beautiful female tiger
uma bonita foca macho a beautiful male seal
Number: forming the plural
Nouns ending in Add Change into
vowel -s
nasal diphthongs -s
consonant:
n, -r, -s, -z -es
-ao
-oes
-ao
-aes
-ao
-aos
-m
-ns
-al
-ais
-el
-eis
-ol
-ois
-ul
-uis
-il (stressed)
-is
-il (unstressed)
-eis
15
2.3. 1 Nouns ending in a vowel or a nasal diphthong generally form their
Nouns plural by adding an -s:
a mesa
as mesas
table
tables
o jogo 1
os jogos
game
games
a lei
as leis
law
laws
o chapeu
os chapeus
hat
hats
a mae
as maes
mother
mothers
1 Usually, the closed -o- sound of the stressed syllable in a word ending in -o changes
into its equivalent open sound before adding the -s:
o jogo
os jogos
game
games
o almoco
os almocos
lunch
lunches
o corpo
os corpos
body
bodies
o ovo
OS ovos
egg
eggs
o povo
os povos
people
peoples
o osso
OS ossos
bone
bones
o olho
os olhos
eye
eyes
o fogo
os fogos
fire
fires
o imposto
os impostos
tax
taxes
2.3.2 Nouns ending in a consonant (-n, -r, -s, -z) form their plural by
adding -es:
o hquen os hquenes lichen
o professor os professores teacher
o pais os paises country
a luz as luzes light
lichens
teachers
countries
lights
2.3.3
The majority of nouns ending in -ao form their plural by changing
this ending into -oes:
a ambicao as ambicoes ambition ambitions
o coracao os coracoes heart hearts
But a few change into -aes:
o pao os paes bread loaves of bread
o cao os caes dog dogs
o alemao os alemaes the German the Germans
and fewer still into -aos:
a mao as maos hand hands
o irmao os irmaos brother brothers
2.3.4 Nouns ending in -m form their plural by changing into -ns:
o som os sons sound sounds
a nuvem as nuvens cloud clouds
2.3.5 Nouns ending in -al, -el, -ol and -ul form their plural by changing
into -ais, -eis, -ois and -uis:
o animal
o hotel
o sol
o azul
But
o mal
o consul
os animais
os hoteis
os sois
os azuis
os males
os consules
animal
hotel
sun
the colour
blue
evil
consul
animals
hotels
suns
the shades of
blue
evils
consuls
2.3.6 Nouns ending in stressed -il form their plural by changing into -is:
o funil os funis funnel funnels
2.3.7 But nouns ending in unstressed -il change into -eis in the plural:
o fossil os fosseis fossil fossils
2.3.8 Some nouns ending in -s have the same form for both singular and
os lapis
os ourives
os cais
os pires
pencil
goldsmith
quay
saucer
pencils
goldsmiths
quays
saucers
2.3.9
Some nouns are almost exclusively used in the plural form:
as algemas handcuffs os oculos glasses
as calcas trousers os cal^oes shorts
2.3.10 Some words have different meanings in the singular and in the
plural:
o pai
o filho
a avo
os pais
os filhos
as avos
os avos
father
son
grandmother
fathers/parents
sons/children
grandmothers
grandparents
Diminutives and augmentatives
Diminutive suffixes
Fern. zinha, zita, inha
Masc. zinho, zito, inho
Augmentative suffixes
ona
ao
2.4.1 The Portuguese language uses diminutive and augmentative
suffixes to express degrees of size, intensity, affection, etc. Normally,
diminutives are used to express smallness, affection and pity, whereas
augmentatives usually express largeness, greatness, beauty or ugliness. B
Diminutives
• smallness
• affection
carrinho
maezinha
coitadinho
small car
mummy
poor thing
Augment atives
• largeness
• greatness
• beauty
• ugliness
carrao
mulherona
mulherao
carao
large car
strong woman
beautiful woman
ugly face
Note: It is not always possible to translate diminutives or augmentatives
into English. These suffixes can have pejorative or grotesque meanings.
They should be used by beginners with caution!
2.4.2 Diminutives are generally used by children or by adults when
talking to children:
A minha amiguinha chama-se Joaninha e vai comigo a
escolinha.
My little friend is called Joaninha and she is in my school.
Se comeres a comidinha toda vais ganhar uma prendinha!
If you eat all this lovely food you will get a nice present!
2.4.3 The most common diminutive suffixes are -zinha, -zinho, -zita,
-zito and -inha, -inho, -ita, -ito. B
2.4.3.1 -zinha, -zinho, -zita, -zito can simply be added to the end of the
word:
mama + zinha
movel + zinho
Joao + zinho
aviao + zinho
cafe + zinho
viela + zita
po + zito
mamazinha
movelzinho
Joaozinho
aviaozinho
cafezinho
vielazita
pozito
mummy
small piece of furniture
Johnny
little plane
small cup of coffee
small alley
light dust
If the word contains an accent, that accent is dropped unless it is indicating
a nasal sound:
pe
cha
aviao 1
+ zito = pezito foot
+ zinho = chazinho tea
+ zinho = aviaozinho little plane
1 The plural of these words is formed from the normal plural of the word itself
before adding -s:
aviao/ aviaozinho
anao/anaozinho
avioes/ avioezinhos
anoes/anoezinhos
2.4.3.2 Words ending in -m change into -n before adding the suffix:
homem + zinho = homenzinho little man
romagem + zinha = romagenzinha small pilgrimage
viagem + zita = viagenzita small trip
2.4.3.3 Words ending in -s, -z, only need -inho or -ito to form a diminu-
tive:
ingles + inho = inglesinho
nariz + inho = narizinho
rapaz + ito = rapazito
nice English boy
pretty little nose
little boy
2.4.3.4
Words ending in -1 may need -zinho or just -inho to form a
diminutive. You should learn the most common forms!
papel + inho = papelinho small piece of paper
girassol + zinho = girassolzinho small sunflower
barril + zito = barrilzito small barrel
2.4.3.5 When -inha, -inho, -ita, -ito are added to nouns and adjectives
ending in unstressed -a, -e, or -o, the final vowel is removed and the suffix
is then added to the word:
fest(a) + inha = festinha small party
gent(e) + inha = gentinha people
tard(e) +
inha
= tardinha
early evening
cop(o) +
inho
= copinho
small glass
cop(o) +
ito
= copito 1
a small drink of wine
But
pequeno > pequenino or pequenininho very small/tiny
Idiomatic use in Portugal.
2.4.4 The most common augmentative suffixes are -ao for the mascu-
line and -ona for the feminine. When they are added to the word, the final
vowel of the root word is suppressed:
livr(o) + ao = livrao massive book
mes(a) + ona = mesona huge table
Compound nouns
2.5. / There are two ways of forming compound nouns in Portuguese.
2.5. 1 . 1 Compounds can be formed by juxtaposition (the structure of the
words is not modified):
pontape (ponta + pe) a kick
terca-feira (terca + feira) Tuesday
cor-de-rosa (cor + de + rosa) pink
2.5. 1 .2 Compounds can also be formed by agglutination (the words
contract and lose one or more of their phonetic elements):
aguardente (agua + ardente) brandy
2.5.2 There are four different ways of forming the plural of compound
nouns.
2.5.2. 1 Both words take an -s if they are:
noun + noun couve-flor/couves-flores cauliflower/s
noun + adjective obra-prima/obras-primas masterpiece/s
adjective + noun ma-lmgua/mas-lmguas gossip/s
numeral + noun quinta-feira/quintas-feiras Thursday/s
2.5.2.2 The second word takes an -s if the two words are:
linked without hyphen passatempo/passatempos hobby/ies
verb
+ noun
guarda-chuva/
guarda-chuvas
invariable + variable noun vice-rei/vice-reis
umbrella/s
viceroy/s
2.5.2.3
The first word takes an -s if the two words are:
linked by a preposition
caminho-de-ferro/ railway/s
caminhos-de-ferro
second word defines first navio-escola/ training-ship/s
navios-escola
2.5.2.4 Both words stay the same in the plural if they are:
verb + adverb fala-barato wind-bag/s (in Portugal)
verb + plural noun saca-rolhas corkscrew/s
Collective nouns
Collective nouns are singular nouns that express the idea of a group of
beings or things of the same kind:
uma alcateia (de lobos) a pack (of wolves)
uma matilha (de caes) a pack (of dogs)
um rebanho (de ovelhas) a flock (of sheep)
uma manada (de gado) a herd (of cattle)
um pomar (de arvores de fruto) an orchard (of fruit trees)
um enxame (de abelhas) a swarm (of bees)
uma quadrilha (de ladroes)
um cardume (de peixes)
uma multidao (de gente)
uma cafila (de camelos)
a gang (of thieves)
a shoal (of fish)
a crowd (of people)
a caravan (of camels)
Collective
nouns
23
JJ Definite article
o (masc. sing.) o chao the floor
a (fern, sing.) a porta the door
os (masc. pi.) os telhados the roofs
as (fern, pi.) as janelas the windows
The definite article, which corresponds to 'the' in English, is used to desig
nate a specific noun, with which it agrees in gender and number:
Eu nao gosto muito de caes, mas o cao da Isabel e amoroso.
I am not very fond of dogs but Isabel's dog is adorable.
Ontem encontrei o Francisco, que Ma o jornal.
Yesterday I met Francisco, who was reading the newspaper.
3.2
3.2.1
Use of the definite article
With first names: 8 O Joao, a Joana.
Note: As a rule first names in Portuguese are preceded by a definite article
(as opposed to Spanish, but similar to Catalan).
3.2.2 | With titles and certain forms of address: B
O senhor/a senhora/a menina quer uma chavena de cha?
Would you like a cup of tea?
A Sra. D. Laura Costa cozinha muito bem. B
Mrs Costa cooks very well.
A encomenda veio para o Sr. Dr. Gomes.
The parcel is for Dr/Mr Gomes.
O Sr. Eng.° Costa nao esta. Quer deixar recado?
Mr Costa is not here. Would you like to leave a message?
(see forms of address below: 12.10.3 and 12.10.4.)
Omission
of the
definite
article
3.2.3 With names of continents, countries, islands and rivers:
a Europa Europe a Madeira Madeira
o Brasil Brazil o Tamisa the Thames
But (-) Portugal (-) Angola
(-) Cabo Verde (-) Mozambique
3.2.4 With days of the week:
A ter^a-feira e feriado.
Tuesday is a bank holiday.
3.2.5 Before possessive adjectives: 6
a minha amiga my (female) friend o nosso carro our car
Omission of the definite article
3.3. / When referring to well-known or outstanding figures (except when
a nuance of familiarity or disparagement is implied or when a reference to
his/her work is made):
Gago Coutinho foi um aviador portugues famoso.
Gago Coutinho was a famous Portuguese pilot.
But
O Gulbenkian tinha rios de dinheiro.
That Gulbenkian was rolling in it.
(a very free translation which conveys the flavour of the original)
25
3.3.2 When a title is used as a vocative:
Sente-se melhor agora, Sr. Gomes?
Are you feeling better now, Mr Gomes?
3.3.3 When a title includes a possessive pronoun:
Sua Majestade, o Rei da Espanha
His Majesty the King of Spain
Sua Excelencia, o Presidente da Republica
His Excellency the President of the Republic
3.3.4
Usually before names of cities and towns:
Lisboa e a capital de Portugal.
Lisbon is the capital of Portugal.
Londres e a capital da Inglaterra.
London is the capital of England.
But
o Porto
o Rio de Janeiro
3.3.5 After the verbs estudar, falar and tocar:
I study chemistry.
I speak Spanish.
I play the piano.
Eu estudo quimica.
Eu falo espanhol.
Eu toco piano.
3.3.6
When making a generalization:
Eu adoro flores. I love flowers.
But
Eu adoro as flores perfumadas. I love fragrant flowers.
Contraction of the definite article Contraction
of the
3.4. 1 The definite article can be contracted with the prepositions de, em,
a and por as follows.
3.4.1.1 Preposition de + article, meaning 'in', 'Y, 'of, 'from':
de + o = do O melhor do mundo!
The best in the world!
de + a = da o livro da Manuela
Manuela's book
de + os = dos O teor dos discursos . . .
The content of the speeches . . .
de + as = das Ela e das llhas Gregas.
She is from the Greek islands.
3.4.1.2 Preposition em + article, meaning 'on', 'at', 'about', 'of, 'in',
definite
article
into :
em + o = no O saco esta no banco.
The bag is on the bench.
em + a = na Eu ando na universidade.
I am at university.
em + os = nos Ele pensa sempre nos filhos.
He always thinks of/about his children.
em + as = nas Ja viste nas gavetas?
Have you checked in the drawers?
3.4.1.3 Preposition a + article, meaning 'on', 'to', 'at':
a + o = ao Ele esta ao telefone.
He is on the phone.
a + a = a A minha avo vai a missa todos os domingos.
My grandmother goes to mass every Sunday.
a + os = aos Ja enviamos as encomendas aos clientes.
We have already sent the parcels to our clients.
a + as = as O jantar de gala e as nove da noite.
The gala dinner is at 9 p.m. 27
3.4.1.4 Preposition por + article, meaning 'along', 'by', 'through', 'for':
por + o = pelo
por + a = pela
por + os = pelos
por + as = pelas
Siga pelo corredor da direita.
Go along the corridor on the right.
As informa$6es foram dadas pela
testemunha.
The information was provided by the witness.
N6s corremos pelos campos.
We ran through the fields.
Ela faz tudo pelas filhas.
She does everything for her daughters.
Indefinite article
um (masc. sing.)
uma (fern, sing.)
uns (masc. pi.)
umas (fern, pi.)
um jardim
uma escova
uns discos
umas praias
a garden
a brush
some/a few records
some/a few beaches
The indefinite article, which corresponds to the English forms 'a', 'an' and
'some', is used to designate non-specific nouns, with which it agrees in
gender and number.
Ontem encontrei um amigo num cafe.
Yesterday I met a friend in a cafe.
Note: Although uns and umas can be considered the plural of the indef-
inite article, the true plural of a noun + indefinite article in Portuguese is
that noun in its plural form, standing alone. Uns and umas actually convey
the meaning of 'some' or alguns/algumas, as opposed to 'others', outros/
outras.
Havia uma flor em cima da mesa.
There was a flower on the table.
Havia flores em cima da mesa.
There were flowers on the table.
Havia umas flores em cima da mesa.
There were some flowers on the table.
Use of the indefinite article Use of the
indefinite
3.6.1 To relate someone to a famous personality:
article
Ele nao e propriamente um Camoes, mas escreve poemas
belissimos.
He is not exactly a Camoes, but he writes beautiful poems.
3.6.2 To indicate someone we do not know very well (could imply
disparaging tone):
Quern ganhou o concurso foi um Rui Sa.
The contest was won by a certain Rui Sa.
3.6.3 To indicate a piece of work by a famous person (usually a painter):
O Andre comprou um Vieira da Silva muito valioso.
Andre has bought a very valuable Vieira da Silva.
Ele vestia um Armani.
He was wearing an Armani.
3.6.4 When it means 'a pair', 'about' or 'such':
umas calcas e uns sapatos
a pair of trousers and a pair of shoes
Ficaram feridos uns quarenta homens.
About forty men were injured.
Tens umas ideias!
You have such (strange) ideas!
Ela tern uns lindos olhos!
She has such beautiful eyes!
29
3.7.1
Omission of the indefinite article
Before an unqualified noun, often indicating profession, rank or
nationality:
O meu tio e dentista.
My uncle is a dentist.
But the article is used if the noun is qualified by an adjective, as a way of
stressing the idea conveyed by that adjective:
O meu tio e um excelente dentista.
My uncle is an excellent dentist.
O meu tio e um dentista excelente.
3.7.2
When making a generalization:
O hotel estava cheio de belgas e alemaes.
The hotel was full of Belgian and German guests.
Contraction of the indefinite article
3.8.1 The indefinite article can be combined with the prepositions em
and de.
Preposition em + indefinite article, meaning 'on a', 'in a', 'into
3.8.1.1
such':
em + um = num Ele sentou-se num banco.
He sat on a bench.
em + uma = numa Ponha o bolo numa caixa, por favor.
Put the cake in a box, please.
em + uns = nuns O artigo usa-se nuns casos e
omite-se noutros.
The article is used in some cases and
omitted in others.
em + umas = numas
Meti-me numas embrulhadas!
I got into such trouble!
3.8. 1 .2 Colloquial use of the preposition de + indefinite article, meaning Contraction
'of a', 'of some'. Although this use is possible, it should be avoided in of the
educated written Portuguese. indefinite
de + urn = dum o filho dum carpinteiro
the son of a carpenter
de + uma = duma a filha duma amiga
the daughter of a friend
de + uns = duns Preciso duns oculos.
I need some glasses.
article
de + umas = dumas A casa e dumas amigas.
The house belongs to some friends.
Chapter 4
Adjectives
Gender
4.1.1 In matters of gender, adjectives tend to follow the same rules as
nouns (see 2.1 and 2.2).
4.1. 1. 1
As a rule, adjectives have a feminine form in -a (especially adjec-
tives ending in -o, -es, -or and -u):
magro magra
ingles inglesa
encantador encantadora
nu nua
thin
English (man/woman)
charming
naked
But some adjectives ending in -or have the same form for both the mascu-
line and the feminine:
anterior
posterior
incolor
anterior
posterior
colourless
bicolor
interior
exterior
bicolour
interior
exterior
And the same happens with the comparative form of adjectives:
maior bigger inferior inferior
menor smaller melhor better
superior superior pior worse
4. 1 . 1 .2 Adjectives ending in -eu have a feminine form in -eia:
europeu europeia B European
ateu ateia atheist
But
judeu
judia
Jewish
4. 1 . 1 .3 Adjectives ending in -ao can have feminine forms in -a, -oa or
-ona:
alemao alema German
beirao beiroa native of Beira (Portugal)
brincalhao brincalhona playful
4.1.2 However, most adjectives ending in -a, -e, -ar, -1, -m, -s and -z in
the masculine keep the same form in the feminine:
hipocrita
hypocritical
original
original
pessimista
pessimist
principal
main
homicida
homicidal
rural
rural
agncola
agricultural
sensi'vel
sensitive
careca
bald
temvel
terrible
possfvel
possible
doce
sweet
cruel
cruel
verde
green
amavel
kind
forte
strong
facil
easy
pobre
poor
util
useful
triste
sad
imbecil
idiotic
grande
big
dificil
difficult
brilhante
brilliant
gentil
charming/kind
quente
hot
azul
blue
4
Adjectives
doente
prudente
regular
vulgar
simples
reles
prudent
regular
ordinary
simple
vulgar
ruim
comun
jovem
capaz
veloz
feliz
bad/wicked
common
young
capable
fast
happy
But espanhol (masc.)/espanhola (fern.)
4.1.3
Some adjectives have irregular feminine forms:
bom boa good
mau ma bad
4.1.4
In compound adjectives only the second element takes the femi-
nine form:
luso-britanico luso-britanica Anglo-Portuguese
But
surdo-mudo surda-muda deaf-mute
m
4.2.1
Number
In matters of number, adjectives tend to follow the same rules as
nouns (see 2.3).
4.2.1.1 Adjectives ending in a vowel add an -s in the plural (see 2.3.1):
branco brancos white
branca brancas
4.2.1.2 Adjectives ending in a consonant (-r, -s, -z) add -es (see 2.3.2):
maior maiores bigger
frances franceses French
capaz capazes capable
Note: The plural form of adjectives ending in -es loses the circumflex
accent.
4.2.1.3 Most adjectives ending in -ao change into -oes, a few into -aes
and even fewer into -aos (see 2.3.3):
espertalhao espertalhoes cunning
alemao alemaes German
sao saos healthy
4.2.1.4 Adjectives ending in -m change into -ns (see 2.3.4):
comum comuns common
4.2. 1 .5 Adjectives ending in -al, -el, -ol and -ul change into -ais, -eis, -ois
and -uis (see 2.3.5):
leal leais loyal
cruel crueis cruel
espanhol espanhois Spanish
azul azuis blue
4.2. 1 .6 Adjectives ending in stressed -il form their plural by changing into
-is (see 2.3.6):
imbecil imbecis idiotic
4.2.1.7 But adjectives ending in unstressed -il change into -eis in the
plural (see 2.3.7):
util uteis useful
versatil versateis versatile 35
4.2.1.8
Adjectives ending in -s have the same form in both singular and
Adjectives plural (see 2.3.8):
uma cancao simples/duas cargoes simples
one simple song/two simple songs
urn homem reles/dois homens reles
one vulgar man/two vulgar men
4.2.2
In compound adjectives, only the second element takes the plural
for
luso-britanico luso-britanicos Anglo-Portuguese
But
urn rapaz surdo-mudo/dois rapazes surdos-mudos
one deaf-mute boy/two deaf-mute boys
4.3.1
Degree
The comparative
superiority mais . . . (do) que more . . . than
equality tao . . . como as ... as
tao . . . quanto B
inferiority menos . . . (do) que less . . . than
Note: Do que is used to compare nouns, and que is used to compare adjec-
tives:
A lebre e mais veloz do que a tartaruga.
The hare is faster than the tortoise.
O Joao e mais estudioso que inteligente.
John is more studious than intelligent.
O vinho e too caro como a cerveja.
Wine is as expensive as beer.
Os hoteis sao tao bons em Portugal como no Brasil.
Os hoteis sao too bons em Portugal quanto no Brasil. B
Hotels are as good in Portugal as in Brazil.
O Outono e menos quente do que o Verao.
Autumn is less warm than Summer.
O clima junto do mar e menos frio que ventoso.
The climate by the sea is less cold than windy.
The adverbs mais and menos may be reinforced by ainda ('even'), muito
('much') or bem ('quite, far more'):
mais atletico do que a Catarina.
ainda
O Joao e I muito
. bem
Joao is even/much/far more athletic than Catarina.
After the comparatives anterior, posterior, inferior, superior and exterior,
the second term of the comparison is introduced by the preposition a (here
meaning 'than' or 'to'):
O apartamento da Rua Direita e inferior a este.
The flat in Rua Direita is worse than this one.
A qualidade do Expresso e superior a de muitos jornais
Portugueses. 1
The quality of the Expresso is superior to that of many Portuguese
newspapers.
1 Remember that preposition a + definite article a = a (see 3.4.1.3 above).
4.3.2 The superlative
4.3.2.1 The relative superlative of superiority: o, a, os, as mais ...
de/que; of inferiority: o, a, os, as menos . . . de/que:
A Ana e a rapariga mais camarada da turma.
Ana is the friendl/est girl in the class.
O Jorge e o rapaz menos camarada que alguma vez conheci.
Jorge is the least friendly boy that I have ever met.
4.3.2.2 The absolute superlative
4.3.2.2. 1 The absolute superlative is usually formed by adding the suffix
-issimo to the adjective:
O Gustavo e engracadfssimo. Gustavo is extremely funny.
4
Adjectives
Note: The ending of the adjective, however, may suffer some changes
before the suffix -issimo can be added:
(a) Adjectives ending in -1, -r and -s just add -issimo:
original origi naif ssi'mo extremely original
vulgar vulganss/mo extremely ordinary
portugues portuguesfss/mo extremely Portuguese
(b) In adjectives ending in a vowel the final vowel is removed before
adding -issimo:
calm(o) calmfssf'mo extremely calm
trist(e) tristiss/mo extremely sad
baix(o) baixiss/mo extremely low/short
(c) Adjectives ending in -vel change into -bilissimo:
agrada(vel) agradab/7/ss/mo most pleasant
nota(vel) notabi/Yss/mo highly notable
hom(vel) horribilissimo utterly horrible
(d) Adjectives ending in -m change into -mssimo:
comum comumss/mo extremely common
(e) Adjectives ending in -z change into -cissimo:
feliz feWdssimo extremely happy
veloz velocissffTio extremely fast
(f) Adjectives ending in -ao change into -amssimo:
sao sanissimo extremely healthy
temporao temporanissimo extremely early (in the season)
(g) Many adjectives revert to their Latin form before acquiring the
superlative endings -issimo, -llimo or -errimo. You are advised to learn
this list:
amigo
amicissimo
extremely friendly
antigo
antiqmssimo
old
simples
simplicissimo
simple
geral
generalissimo
general
amargo
amanssimo
bitter
doce
duldssimo
sweet
frio
frigidfssimo
cold
nobre
nobihssimo
noble
sabio
sapientissimo
wise/knowledgeable
difkil
dificilimo
difficult
facil
fadlimo
easy
pobre
pauperrimo
poor
celebre
celeberrimo
famous
4.3.2.2.2 The absolute superlative can also be formed by placing an
appropriate adverb before the adjective:
O Gustavo e muito engra^ado. 1 Gustavo is very funny.
Note: Although the regular form is advised in formal language, in conver-
sation, the superlative formed with adverbs is preferred: muito frio instead
of frigidissimo.
1 Muito is the most commonly used adverb, but the following list can help to enrich
your use of Portuguese:
bastante very extremamente extremely
excepcionalmente exceptionally grandemente greatly
excessivamente excessively imensamente immensely
extraordinariamente extraordinarily terrivelmente terribly
4
4.3.3
Special comparative and
superlative forms
Adjectives
Comparative
Superlative
Relative
Absolute
bom
melhor 1
o melhor
optimo
mau
pior 2
o pior
pessimo
grande
maior 3
o maior
maximo
pequeno
menor 4
o menor
mmimo
muito
mais
o mais
muitissimo
pouco
menos
o menos
poucjuissimo
superior
o superior
supremo
inferior
o inferior
mfimo
1 Never mais bom.
2 Never mais mau.
3 Never mais grande.
4 But mais pequeno is more frequently used than menor, although in Brazilian
Portuguese menor is preferred. 6
4.4.1
Agreement
In Portuguese, adjectives always agree in gender and number with
the nouns they qualify:
um senhor alto
duas senhoras altos
a tall gentleman
two tall ladies
a lingua e a cultura portuguesos
Portuguese language and culture
os casacos e os sapatos castanhos
the brown coats and the brown shoes
But if the nouns are of different gender, the adjective goes into the mascu-
line plural:
as mulheres e os homens britanicos
the British women and men
O livro e a caneta sao novos.
The book and the pen are new.
And if the nouns are of different number, the adjective changes to plural
and agrees with the gender of the nouns it is qualifying, remembering that
the masculine takes precedence over the feminine:
os caes e o gato vadios the stray dogs and cat
a comida e as bebidas Mas cold food and drinks
a revista e os livros franceses the French magazine and books
Position in the sentence
4.5. / In Portuguese, adjectives usually follow the noun.
4.5.1.1 When the adjective describes a characteristic of the noun, such
as colour, material, size, nationality, shape, religion or taste:
uma pasta azul a blue briefcase
um tecido sedoso a silky material
um livro grande a large book
uma mulher holandesa a Dutch woman
um saco redondo a round bag
a religiao catolica the Catholic religion
vinho doce sweet wine
4.5.1.2 When the adjective is preceded by modifiers such as muito,
pouco, bastante:
uma casa muito grande a very big house
4.5.2 But the adjective can precede the noun in some cases.
4.5.2.1 If the relative superlative is used: o melhor, o pior, o maior, o
O pior castigo e a prisao perpetua.
The worst punishment is life imprisonment.
4
Adjectives
4.5.2.2 With figurative meaning:
urn grande homem a great man
uma pobre mulher an unfortunate woman
urn velho amigo an old friend (of many years)
4.5.2.3 Sometimes we can place an adjective before the noun in order
to add other adjectives after it, and thus avoid a long monotonous list of
adjectives:
uma excelente escola profissional
an excellent training school
Note: When combining a series of adjectives, start with the more general
and finish with the more particular:
Eles vivem num casarao enorme, velho, feio e frio.
They live in a huge, old, ugly, and cold mansion.
Pronouns
Personal pronouns
There are five types of personal pronouns in Portuguese:
• subject pronouns;
• direct object pronouns;
• indirect object pronouns;
• prepositional pronouns;
• reflexive pronouns.
5.1.1 Subject pronouns*
eu I nos we
tu, voce 1 you (vos), voces' you
ele, ela he, she eles, elas they
Voce and voces are forms of address and not pronouns, but they are often used
as subject pronouns, especially in Brazilian Portuguese.
Tu is only used when addressing friends, relatives and children. Voce is a
little more formal, but not formal enough to address either someone you
have never met before or a superior, in which case you should use o senhor
or a senhora.
Although voce and o senhor/a senhora mean 'you' (2nd person sing.) in
English, in Portuguese the verb must be in the third person singular. To
help you understand why, imagine that you are in court addressing the
judge, and you call him 'Your Honour': 'Does Your Honour require further
information?' As you can see, you have used the third person singular for
the verb, but what you really meant was 'you'. This is similar to the way
that voce and o senhor/a senhora work in Portuguese.
Tu es muito simpatico.
You (sing.) are very kind.
Voce/o senhor/a senhora e muito simpatico/a.
You (sing.) are very kind.
V6s is in parentheses in the above table because it is now considered an
old-fashioned or regional form of address, and is usually replaced by voces.
Voces works as the plural of both tu and voce. As above, although this
form refers to the second person plural, the verb in Portuguese is in the
third person plural:
Vos sois muito simpaticos. You (pi.) are very kind.
Voces sao muito simpaticos. You (pi.) are very kind.
5. 1 . 1 . 1 Subject pronouns are usually omitted in Portuguese, because the
verb already contains information on person and number: 6
(tu) Vens ao cinema? Are you coming to the cinema?
(nos) Estavamos a tua espera. We were waiting for you.
5.1.1.2 But the subject pronoun must be specified whenever there is
doubt as to whom the verb is referring:
E/e quer/o ir ao teatro. He wanted to go to the theatre.
Eu quer/o ir ao cinema. I wanted to go to the cinema.
5.1.1.3
The subject pronoun is also used to emphasize who is doing what:
Eu quero ir ao cinema, mas e/es querem ir ao teatro.
I want to go to the cinema but they want to go to the theatre.
5. 1.2 Direct object pronouns^
£
me
te
o, a
me
you
him, her, it,
you
nos
vos
os, as
us
you
them
5.1.2.1 Usually the direct object pronoun follows the verb and is linked
to it by a hyphen: B
(a) In affirmative statements:
Ele encontrou-vos no teatro. He met you in the theatre.
Eu levo-te a estacao. I'll take you to the station.
Ela viu o Paulo. Ela viu-o. She saw Paulo. She saw him.
0 Rui compra a casa. Rui buys the house.
Ele compra-o. He buys it
(b) In affirmative commands:
Come o bolo. Come-o. Eat the cake. Eat it.
(c) In questions not introduced by an interrogative:
Viste-o ontem? Did you see him yesterday?
(d) After co-ordinating conjunctions such as e ('and'), mas ('but'), porem
('however'), todavia ('nevertheless'), contudo ('however'):
Eu tinha duas canetas mas perdi-os.
1 had two pens but I lost them.
Ele herdou uma fortuna, porem gastou-o em pouco tempo.
He inherited a fortune, however, he lost it in a short time.
5. 1 .2.2 But the direct object pronoun precedes the verb in the following
(a) In negative sentences (nao, nunca, jamais, nem, ninguem, nenhum,
nada):
Ele nao nos viu a janela. He didn't see us at the window.
Nunca o tinha visto antes. I had never seen him before.
Ninguem o soube. Nobody knew it
(b) In questions introduced by an interrogative (quern?, qual?, quando?,
onde?, etc.):
Quern me faz um favor? Who will do me a favour?
Onde os encontraste? Where did you find them 7 .
(c) After conjunctions such as que ('that') or como ('as'):
Acho que me viram a janela.
I think someone saw me at the window.
Como os queres preparar agora, aqui estao.
As/since/given that you want them prepared now, here they are.
(d) When it follows adverbs such as: ainda, tudo, sempre, tambem, talvez,
pouco, bastante, muito:
Ainda os tens?
Have you still got them 7 .
Tudo nos recorda a nossa casa.
Everything reminds us of home.
Sempre a levas para Leiria? B
Are you finally taking her to Leiria?
Tambem vos lembram.
They also remember you.
Talvez os encontremos no cinema.
Perhaps we will meet them in the cinema.
Bastante me tern pedido que ignore o assunto.
They have often asked me to ignore the matter.
But the pronoun is placed after the verb if the adverb sempre is also placed
after. Note that sempre is a modifier; it changes the meaning of the sentence
depending on its position:
Eu encontro-o sempre na praia.
I always meet him at the beach.
Ontem sempre o vi na biblioteca. B
Yesterday I finally saw him in the library.
(e) When it follows adjectives or pronouns such as todos/as, bastantes,
muitos/muitas, poucos/as, alguem, algo:
Todas me trouxeram um presente.
They all brought me a present.
Bastantes vezes os convidei.
I invited them many times.
Muitos me viram no programa de televisao.
Many people saw me on the television programme.
5.1.2.3 In positive sentences with Future and Conditional Tenses the Personal
direct object pronoun is placed between the verb stem and ending, but in pronouns
negative sentences it precedes the verbal form as usual: B
Essa decisao leva-lo-a a ruma.
That decision will lead you to ruin.
Mas esta alternativa nao o levari a vitoria.
But this alternative will not lead you to success.
Isso poder-me-ia afectar negativamente.
That could affect me negatively.
Mas nao me importaria fazer nova tentativa.
But I would not mind having another go.
5. 1 .2.4 Variant forms of direct object pronouns:
(a) If the verb ends in a vowel or an oral diphthong, the pronoun is not
altered:
A Maria fez um bolo e eu vi-o.
Maria baked a cake and I saw it.
Mas o Joao comeu-o todo sozinho.
But Joao ate it all by himself.
(b) If the verb ends in -r, -s or -z, these endings are removed and the
pronouns -o, -a, -os, -as change into -lo, -la, -los, -las:
Vamos partir o bolo. Vamos parti-/o.
Let's cut the cake. Let's cut it.
Perdemos a faca. Perdemo-/a.
We lost the knife. We lost it.
Diz a verdade. D\-la.
Tell the truth. Tell it.
But
Ele quer a faca. Ele quere-o.
He wants the knife. He wants it.
Tu tens outra faca. Tu tem-la.
You have another knife. You have it
Note: If the verb ends in -ar or -az, the a takes an acute accent to main-
tain the open sound of the vowel:
Vou provar o bolo. Vou provd-/o.
I'll try the cake. I'll try it.
A Maria faz bons bolos. Ela ia-los.
Maria bakes good cakes. She bakes them.
Note: If the verb ends in -er or -ez, the e takes a circumflex accent to main-
tain the closed sound of the vowel:
Muito prazer em conhece-/o.
Very pleased to meet you.
A Maria fez bolos. A Maria fe-/os.
Maria baked cakes. Maria baked them.
Note: Infinitives of compounds of por (e.g. compor, dispor, repor, etc.) do
not have a circumflex accent on the 'o' but it is added when the final V of
the infinitive is dropped before taking a direct object pronoun:
Onde esta o dinheiro? Devo repd-lo no cofre antes de sair.
Where is the money? I must put it back in the safe before leaving.
(c) If the verb ends in -m, -ao, -6e or -oes, the pronouns -o, -a, -os, -as
change into -no, -na, -nos, -nas:
Eles sabem a verdade. Eles sabem-no.
They know the truth. They know it.
Elas sao corajosas. Elas sao-no.
They are brave. They are [it].
Elas poem a vida em risco. Elas poem-na em risco.
They put their lives at risk. They put them at risk.
Note: What decides the pronominal forms -no, -na, -nos, -nas is the verbal
ending in a nasal diphthong, even if spelt with -em or -am:
Elas contam as suas aventuras. Elas contam-nas.
They recount their adventures. They recount them.
5. 1.3 Indirect object pronouns*
me
me
nos
us
te
you
vos
you
Ihe
him, her, it,
Ihes
them
you
Personal
pronouns
5.1.3.1 As with the direct object pronoun, the indirect object pronoun
is linked to the verb by a hyphen and is placed after it in affirmative
sentences, commands, questions not introduced by an interrogative and
after co-ordinating conjunctions:
'De-me o dinheiroP, disse o ladrao.
'Give me the money!', said the thief.
Eu dei-/fie a carteira.
I gave him the handbag.
Deste-/fie mesmo? Sim, dei-a.
Did you really give it to him 7 . Yes, I did (give it).
5.1.3.2 But it precedes the verb in negative and interrogative sentences,
and after certain adverbs, just as the direct object pronoun (see above,
5.1.2.2):
Nao Ihes digas que eu estive aqui.
Don't tell them I was here.
Quern te deu essa ideia?
Who gave you that idea?
Eles sempre me incomodam muito.
They always upset me deeply.
5. 1.4 Contraction of the direct and indirect object pronouns
When direct and indirect object pronouns appear in the same sentence, they
can be contracted. The indirect object pronoun precedes the direct object
pronoun:
49
me + o
mo
nos + o
no-lo
me + a
=
ma
nos + a
=
no-la
me + os
=
mos
nos + os
=
no-los
me + as
=
mas
nos + as
—
no-las
te + o
-
to
vos + o
-
vo-lo
te + a
=
ta
vos + a
-
vo-la
te + os
-
tos
vos + OS
—
vo-los
te + as
-
tas
vos + as
-
vo-las
Ihp + n
IMC 1 \J
Ihn
II IU
hoc + o
II ICJ 1 KJ
Ihn
II IU
Ihe + a
lha
Ihes + a
lha
Ihe + os
Ihos
Ihes + os
Ihos
Ihe + as
lhas
Ihes + as
lhas
(see 5.1.2.3)
Ele deu-me o livro. Ele deu-mo. He gave it to me.
Ele deu-te a revista. Ele deu-to. He gave it to you.
Ele deu-/fie os sapatos. Ele deu-/hos. He gave them to him/her.
Ele deu-nos a caneta. Ele deu-no-/o. He gave it to us.
Ele deu-vos os discos. Ele deu-vo-/os. He gave them to you.
Ele deu-/hes a garrafa. Ele deu-/ha. He gave it to them.
Note: Word order is the same as for any direct or indirect object pronoun
(see 5.1.2.2):
Ela deu-te o livro? Did she give you the book?
Nao, ela nao mo deu. No, she did not give it to me.
5. 1.5 Prepositional pronouns 2.
50
5. 1 .5. 1 Prepositional pronouns are personal pronouns used with prepo-
sitions such as de, em, para, por, sobre:
mim
nos
me
us
ti, si 1
you
(vos), voces 2
you
ele, ela
him, her, it
eles, elas
them
Essas flores sao para miml
Are those flowers for me?
Sao. Foram enviadas por eles.
Yes. They were sent by them.
0 que vai ser de nos?
What will become of us?
Nao somos ninguem sem ela.
We are no one without her.
Tenho um presente para sila senhoralo senhorlo sr. Dr., etc. 1
1 have a present for you.
Tambem ha presentes para voces. 2
There are also presents for you.
1 Si corresponds to the personal pronoun voce. Sometimes, to avoid confusion, one
can equally use o senhor, a senhora, as objects of a preposition.
2 The plural of ti and si is voces, or os senhores, as senhoras, Vs. Exas., etc. (since
vos has become obsolete).
Personal
pronouns
5.1.5.2 With the prepositions com, em and de, some prepositional
com + nos = connosco, conosco B
com + vos = convosco
pronouns change their form:
com + mim = comigo
com + ti = contigo
com + si = consigo
But com ele, com ela, com voces, com eles, com elas.
de + ele = dele de + eles = deles
de + ela = dela de + elas = delas
But de mim, de ti, de nos, de voces.
em + ele = nele em + eles = neles
em + ela = nela em + elas = nelas
But em mim, em ti, em nos, em voces.
Note: Prepositional pronouns preceded by the preposition a can be used
emphatically after direct or indirect object pronouns:
Da-me o livro a mim.
Give the book to me (i.e. not to someone else).
5.1.6 Reflexive pronouns*
eu lavo-me
1 wash myself
tu lavas-te, voce lava-se
you wash yourself
ele/ela lava-se
he/she washes himself/herself
nos lavamo-nos 1
we wash ourselves
(vos lavai-vos), voces lavam-se
you wash yourselves
eles/elas lavam-se
they wash themselves
1 When the pronoun is placed after a verbal form in the first person plural, the verb
loses its final -s (nos lavamos - nos lavamo-nos).
5.1.6.1 As with direct and indirect object pronouns, the reflexive
pronoun usually follows the verb (linked to it by a hyphen) except in nega-
tive and interrogative sentences, after conjunctions, prepositions and in
relative clauses (see 5.1.2.2):
Ele sentou-se.
He sat down.
Mas ela nao se sentou.
But she did not sit.
Elas choram porque se sentem tristes.
They cry because they feel sad.
Esta na hora de me deitar.
It's time for me to go to bed.
Ele pediu-nos que nos levantassemos.
He asked us to stand up.
Quern se senta aqui?
Who is going to sit here?
5. 1 .6.2 The reflexive pronoun se - third person singular - is often used
impersonally, translating the English 'you', 'one', 'they', 'people':
Neste restaurante come-se bem.
One can eat well in this restaurant.
Possessive pronouns and adjectives
Possessive pronouns and adjectives have exactly the same form in
Portuguese, with the exception that the use of the article is optional with
possessive pronouns. 6
Possessive adjectives are placed between the definite article and the noun
they qualify, whereas possessive pronouns replace the noun and may be
preceded by the definite article to add emphasis or to denote a contrast:
Possessive adjective
As minhas malas sao pesadas.
My suitcases are heavy.
Possessive pronoun
As malas pesadas sao (as)
minhas.
The heavy suitcases are mine.
5.2. / Possessive adjectives*
o meu
a minha
os meus
as minhas
my
o teu/seu
a tua/sua
os teus/seus
as tuas/suas
your
o seu 1
a sua
os seus
as suas
his/her
o nosso
a nossa
os nossos
as nossas
our
o vosso
a vossa
OS vossos
as vossas
your
o seu 1
a sua
os seus
as suas
their
1 Since seu/sua/seus/suas can refer to the second person singular formal, to the third
person singular and to the third person plural, some confusion often arises as to
whom it refers. Therefore, seu/sua/seus/suas is usually replaced by a de phrase
whenever it refers to the third persons:
o seu carro = o carro dele/dela/deles/delas his/her/their car
a sua carteira = a carteira dele/dela/deles/delas his/her/their wallet
O trabalho dela e mais completo do que o dele.
Her work is more thorough than his.
5.2.2 Possessive pronouns*
(o) meu
(a) minha
(os) meus
(as) minhas
mine
(o) teu/seu
(a) tua/sua
(os) teus/seus
(as) tuas/suas
yours
(o) seu 1
(a) sua
(os) seus
(as) suas
his/hers
(o) nosso
(a) nossa
(os) nossos
(as) nossas
ours
(o) vosso
(a) vossa
(os) vossos
(as) vossas
yours
(o) seu 1
(a) sua
(os) seus
(as) suas
theirs
1 These pronouns are usually replaced by a de phrase to avoid confusion (see 5.2.1)
5.2.3 In Portuguese, possessives agree in gender and number with the
thing possessed and not with the possessor (as it does in English):
A Maria veio no seu carro.
Maria came in her car.
O Pedro veste a sua camisa nova.
Pedro puts on his new shirt.
5.2.4 As a rule, possessives are not used when the relationship between
possessor and possessed is likely or obvious. This applies particularly to
parts of the body, clothing or footwear; in this case, the definite article is
preferred:
Ela veio de carro.
She came in her car./She came by car.
A Ana falou com a mae.
Ana spoke to her mother.
Abre a boca e fecha os olhos.
Open your mouth and close your eyes.
A Raquel vestiu a camisa.
Raquel put on her shirt.
Ele engraxou os sapatos.
He polished his shoes.
But if the possessor is not clear, the possessive must be used:
Os meus olhos sao verdes. My eyes are green.
A Ana visitou a minha mae. Ana visited my mother.
Demonstrative pronouns
este
esta
estes
estas
this/these (near the speaker)
esse
essa
esses
essas
that/those (near the hearer)
aquele
aquela
aqueles
aquelas
that/those (far from both)
Este e o meu amigo Henrique.
This is my friend Henrique.
Pode passar-me esse livro, por favor?
Can you pass me that book, please?
Aquele restaurante e muito bom.
That restaurant is very good.
5.3. / In Portuguese, there are also neuter demonstrative pronouns. They
are invariable and are used when the speaker cannot or will not identify
an object precisely:
isto this (near the speaker)
isso that (near the hearer)
aquilo that (far from both)
O que e isto?
What is this?
Isso e impossfvel!
That is impossible!
Aquilo deve ser um disco-voador.
That must be a flying saucer.
5 5.3.2 Demonstratives can be combined with the prepositions de, em
Pronouns and a:
de + este = deste
de + esta = desta
de + estes = destes
de + estas = destas
em + este = neste
em + esta = nesta
em + estes = nestes
em + estas = n estas
de + esse = desse em + esse = nesse
de + essa = dessa em + essa = nessa
de + esses = desses em + esses = nesses
de + esas = dessas em + essas = nessas
de
+
aquele
= daquele
de
+
aquela
= daquela
de
+
aqueles
= daqueles
de
+
aquelas
= daquelas
a
+
aquele
= aquele
a
+
aquela
= aquela
a
+
aqueles
= aqueles
a
+
aquelas
= aquelas
em
+
aquele
= naquele
em
+
aquela
= naquela
em
+
aqueles
= naqueles
em
+
aquelas
= naquelas
Nao gosto deste vinho.
I don't like this wine.
O que e que tens nessas caixas?
What do you have in those boxes?
Nunca fui aquele cinema.
I have never been to that cinema.
5.3.3 Neuter demonstrative pronouns also contract with the same
prepositions as above:
de
+
isto
= disto
em
+
isto =
nisto
de
+
isso
= disso
em
+
isso =
nisso
de
+
aquilo
= daquilo
em
+
aquilo =
naquilo
a
+
aquilo
= aquilo
5.3.4 Agreement of demonstratives
Demonstratives used adjectivally agree in gender and number with the
noun they precede. When qualifying more than one noun, they agree with
the nearest:
este homem
esta mulher
esses homens e mulheres
aquelas mulheres e homens
this man
this woman
those men and women
those women and men
Relative pronouns
5.4.1
que
who, whom, which, that
o que, a que, os que, as que
the one that/who, the ones that/who, what
These are the most frequently used relative pronouns. They can refer to
either people or things and may be used as the subject or object of a verb:
Aquela rapariga que falou contigo na festa e minha prima.
That girl who spoke to you at the party is my cousin.
O rapaz que vi esta manna anda na minha turma.
The boy whom I saw this morning is in my class.
Esse livro e o que eu te comprei?
Is that book the one (that) I bought you?
Aquelas senhoras sao as que me disseram para vir.
Those ladies are the ones who told me to come.
Isso foi o que ele disse!
That's what he said!
Note: In Portuguese, relative pronouns cannot be omitted as they some-
times can in English.
5.4.2
quern who, whom, the one/the ones who
(a) Quern can be used instead of que when the verb ser introduces the
subordinate clause (but que is also acceptable). In these cases, the
pronoun quern takes the verb in the third person singular:
Foste tu quern contou o meu segredo!
Foste tu que contaste o meu segredo!
It was you who revealed my secret!
(b) Quern is used when referring to a person and follows a preposition
such as: com, a, contra, entre, excepto B , para, perante, por, salvo,
segundo, sob, sobre:
O rapaz com quern falei e de Lisboa.
The boy whom I talked to is from Lisbon.
Perante quern fizeste tal afirmacao?
Before whom did you make such a statement?
Eles preferem trabalhar para quern paga melhor salario.
They prefer to work for the ones [those] who pay a better salary.
B Exceto in Brazilian Portuguese.
where, in which
Refers to places:
Fui a casa onde viveu Jose Regio.
I went to the house where Jose Regio lived.
It may have some variations:
aonde where donde from where, from which
A casa aonde vais pertenceu a Jose Regio.
The house you are going to belonged to Jose Regio.
A universidade donde vens e famosa.
The university where you are from is famous.
5.4.4
o qual, a qual, os quais, as quais who, whom, which, that
Refers to people or things. It is preceded by a noun with which it agrees
in gender and number (it can be used to replace the relative pronouns que
and quern, in order to make the sentence clearer):
Os nossos vizinhos com os quais nos damos ha anos,
tambem vao.
Our neighbours, whom we have got on with for years, are also
going.
Note: It is mainly used in written language; in colloquial Portuguese the
sentence would be:
Os nossos vizinhos com quern nos damos ha anos, tambem
vao.
5.4.5
cujo, cuja, cujos, cujas whose, of whom, of which
This pronoun implies ownership. It can also refer to people or things and
is followed by a noun with which it agrees in gender and number:
Este e o homem cuyo carro foi roubado.
This is the man whose car was stolen.
E esta a camisa cujos botoes se perderam?
Is this the shirt the buttons of which have been lost? 59
5.4.6
quanto, quanta, quantos, quantas
all that/who, everything that, everyone who
This pronoun is normally preceded by the indefinite pronouns tudo; todo,
toda, todos, todas:
Isto e tudo quanto sei.
This is all (that) I know.
Todos quantos viram o acidente afirmaram ter sido por
excesso de velocidade.
All who saw the accident blamed it on excess speed.
Interrogative pronouns
5.5./
que, o que
Que queres?
O que queres?
Que e uma bica?
O que e uma bica?
Que cor preferes?
what, which
What do you want?
What is a 'bica'?
Which colour do you prefer?
5.5.2
quern
a quern
de quern
Quern e aquele?
who
to whom
whose
Who is that?
A quern ofereceste o colar? To whom did you give the necklace?
De quern e aquele carro? Whose car is that?
5.5.3 Interrogative
pronouns
qual, quais
what, which (one)
Qual e o nome desta estacao?
What is the name of this station?
Quais destas malas sao as suas?
Which of these suitcases are yours?
Note: Qual expresses more clearly the idea of choice from a limited number
of things than que. The main difference between these two interrogative
pronouns is that que is usually followed by a noun but qual never is:
Que cor preferes? What colour do you prefer?
Qual e a tua cor preferida? Which is your favourite colour?
5.5.4
quanto, quanta, quantos, quantas how much, how many
Quanto custa este vestido? How much is this dress?
Quantas laranjas comeste? How many oranges did you eat?
5.5.5 E que is often added to the interrogative pronouns to give
emphasis:
O que e que queres?
Quern e que e aquele?
A quern e que ofereceste o colar?
De quern e que e aquele carro?
Qual e que e a tua cor preferida?
Quanto e que custa este vestido?
5.5.6 As well as these interrogative pronouns, some adverbs are also
used to ask questions:
(a) como 'how':
Como esta? How are you? 61
(b) onde 'where':
Onde fica a casa-de-banho? Where is the toilet?
(c) porque, porque 'why':
Porque nao vens? Porque? Why aren't you coming? Why?
Porque e que nao vens?
Note: Do not mistake it for por que (preposition por + pronoun):
Por que razao nao vens?
For what reason (why) are you not coming?
Por que caminho seguiste?
Which route did you follow?
Indefinite pronouns and adjectives
algo
alguem
certo, certa, certos, certas
tal, tais
cada
varios, varias
bastante, bastantes
muito, muita, muitos, muitas
todo, toda, todos, todas
tudo
pouco, pouca, poucos, poucas
nenhum, nenhuma, nenhuns, nenhumas
ninguem
nada
something
someone
certain
such
each
various
a lot
many
all, the whole of
everything
few
none
no one
nothing
Indefinite pronouns and adjectives refer to an undetermined third person
or thing:
Ha algo de errado com o carro.
There is something wrong with the car.
Nao ha nada de errado.
No, there is nothing wrong with it.
Alguem viu o Pedro?
Has anyone seen Pedro?
Nao, ninguem o viu.
No, no one has seen him.
Perdi os meus livros. Viste alguml
I've lost my books. Have you seen any of them?
Nao, nao vi nenhum.
No, I haven't seen any.
Tenho muitos amigos Portugueses e bastantes amigos
franceses, mas tenho poucos amigos russos.
I have many Portuguese friends and quite a few French friends but I
have few Russian friends.
Certos carros sao muito caros, mas nao todos. ]
Some cars are very expensive but not all.
Ele pensa que sabe tudo 2 mas nao sabe nada.
He thinks he knows everything but he knows nothing.
Ele adormece em qualquer lugar.
He falls asleep in any place.
Estes bolos custam dois euros cada, mas se comprares
varios fica mais barato.
These cakes cost two euros each but if you buy several it's cheaper.
No outro dia fui ao teatro.
I went to the theatre the other day.
Nao podemos aceitar tal coisa.
We cannot accept such a thing.
Tais pessoas so gostam de boatos.
Such people only enjoy gossip.
Todo agrees in gender and number with the noun it accompanies (todo, toda,
todos, todas) and means 'all' in the sense of 'entire' or 'whole of. It never precedes
isto, isso, aquilo.
Comi o bolo todo. I ate the whole cake.
Tudo is invariable and means 'everything'. It is never used before a noun, but can
precede isto, isso, aquilo.
Ele ja sabia tudo isso. He already knew all that.
Comi tudo o que estava na mesa. I ate everything on the table.
Numerals
Cardinal, ordinal and multiplicative numbers
CnrHinnl
V*UI VJII IUI
OrHinnl
\y i vjii iui
A/1 / 1 Itih licntivp
Augmentative*
Diminutive
0
1
zero
um/uma
primeiro/a
2
dois/duas
segundo/a
duplo/a, dobro
meio
3
tres
terceiro/a
triplo/a
terco
4
quatro
quarto/a
quadruplo/a
quarto
5
cinco
ni iinto/a
VJ U 1 1 1 LU/ Cl
ni nnti mlo/^
VJ U 1 1 ILU VJ\\J 1 CL
ni linto
VJ U 1 1 1
6
seis
sexto/a
sextuplo/a
sexto
7
sete
setimo/a
septuplo/a
setimo
8
oito
oitavo/a
octuplo/a
oitavo
9
nove
nono/a
nonuplo/a
nono
10
dez
decimo/a
decuplo/a
decimo
1 1
onze
decimo/a primeiro/a
onze avos
12
doze
decimo/a segundo/a
doze avos
13
treze
decimo/a terceiro/a
etc.
14
catorze B
decimo/a quarto/a
15
quinze
decimo/a quinto/a
16
dezasseis B
decimo/a sexto/a
17
dezassete B
decimo/a setimo/a
18
dezoito
decimo/a oitavo/a
19
dezanove B
decimo/a nono/a
20
vinte
vigesimo/a
21
vinte e um/uma
vigesimo/a primeiro/a
22
vinte e dois/duas
vigesimo/a segundo/a
23
vinte e tres
vigesimo/a terceiro/a
30
trinta
trigesimo/a
40
quarenta
quadragesimo/a
50
cinquenta
quinquagesimo/a
60
sessenta
sexagesimo/a
70
setenta
septuagesimo/a
80
oitenta
octogesimo/a
90
noventa
nonagesimo/a
100
cem
centesimo/a
101
cento e um/uma
centesimo/a primeiro/a
200
duzentos/as
ducentesimo/a
300
trezentos/as
tricentesimo/a
400
quatrocentos/as
quadringentesim o/a
500
quinhentos/as
quingentesimo/a
600
seiscentos/as
sexcentesimo/a
700
setecentos/as
septingentesimo/a
800
oitocentos/as
octingentesimo/a
900
novecentos/as
nongentesimo/a
1,000
mil
milesimo/a
1,000,000
um milhao
milionesimo/a
1,000,000,000 urn bilhao
bilionesimo/a
Cardinal,
ordinal and
multiplicative
numbers
centuplo/a
um biliao
1 Often, instead of a multiplicative augmentative number, it is preferable to use the
expression vezes mais:
Este valor e 25 vezes mais alto/baixo do que o anterior.
This amount is 25 times higher/lower than the previous one.
65
6.2
Collective numerals
urn par a pair
= 2
uma meia duzia 'half a dozen' = 6
uma dezena
= 10
uma duzia 'a dozen'
= 12
uma centena
= 100
um cento
= 100
uma grosa 'a gross'
= 144 (12 x 12)
um milhar
= 1 ,000
Use of the conjunction e with numerals
35
trinta e cinco
349 trezentos e quarenta e nove
1 ,892 mil (-) oitocentos e noventa e dois
2,349 dois mil (-) trezentos e quarenta e nove
But
1 ,800 mil e oitocentos
1 ,700 mil e setecentos
2, 100 dois mil e cem
Reading a long number is like making an enumeration where the last two
elements are linked by the conjunction e. The e which is part of the tens
group does not count.
Note: After 110,000, the number is read in groups of three figures:
293,272 duzentos e noventa e tres mil (-) duzentos e setenta e dois
Note: Where numbers have been given in figures in this chapter they have
been written in the English style. In Portuguese, however, the decimal point
is replaced by a decimal comma. A point is used to separate the thousands:
Portuguese English
2,5 kg = 2.500 g 2.5 kg = 2,500 g
35,6 km = 35.600 m 35.6 km = 35,600 m
Roman numerals
Roman numerals are used in Portuguese to refer to centuries and in
monarchs' and popes' names. When reading them, use an ordinal up to
and including IX and a cardinal from X onwards.
No seculo VIII (oitavo) os Arabes invadiram a Peninsula
Iberica.
In the eighth century the Arabs invaded the Iberian Peninsula.
D. Joao I (primeiro) foi o fundador da segunda dinastia em
finais do sec. XIV (seculo catorze).
King Joao I was the founder of the second Portuguese dynasty at
the end of the fourteenth century.
Joao XXI (vinte e um) foi um papa portugues.
John XXI was a Portuguese pope.
Roman
67
Moods and tenses
The following shows all possible moods and tenses of the first person
singular of the regular -ar verb estudar. It is intended for reference only;
the following pages give full conjugations for all tenses.
Indicative mood
Present tenses
Past tenses
Future tenses
Subjunctive mood
Present tenses
Past tenses
Future tenses
Present
Present Perfect
Imperfect
Preterite
Past Perfect
Pluperfect
Future
Future Perfect
Conditional
Conditional Perfect
Present
Present Perfect
Past
Past Perfect
Future
Future Perfect
estudo
tenho estudado
estudava
estudei
tinha estudado
estudara
estudarei
terei estudado
estudaria
teria estudado
estude
tenha estudado
estudasse
tivesse estudado
estudar
tiver estudado
Imperative mood
estuda (tu)
Indicative
estude (voce)
mood
estudemos (nos)
estudai (vos)
estudem (voces)
Infinitive
estudar
Compound Infinitive
ter estudado
Present Participle (gerund)
estudando
Compound Present Participle
tendo estudado
Past Participle
estudado
In Portuguese there are four main groups of verbs:
(a) 1st conjugation: all verbs with Infinitives ending in -ar;
(b) 2nd conjugation: all verbs with Infinitives ending in -er;
(c) 3rd conjugation: all verbs with Infinitives ending in -ir;
(d) 4th conjugation: all derivatives of the verb por.
To form the simple tenses of regular verbs, remove the ending of the
Infinitive (-ar, -er, -ir, -or). Add the endings shown below to the stem of
the verb, for example:
estudar = estudo (first person singular of the Present Indicative)
The compound tenses of regular verbs are formed by the auxiliary verb ter
(in the appropriate person) + Past Participle of the main verb, for example:
ter estudado = tenho estudado
(first person singular of the Present Perfect Indicative)
Indicative mood
7.2. / Present
7.2.1.1 Meanings
(a) Action in the present:
Que fazesl What are you doing 7 .
Leio o jornal. / am reading the paper. 69
(b) Habitual or repetitive action in the present:
Ela viaja muito.
She travels a lot.
Eu chego sempre as nove da manna.
I always arrive at 9 a.m.
(c) Universal statement:
Dois mais dois sao quatro.
Two and two are four.
0 sol quando nasce e para todos.
When the sun rises it is for everyone.
(d) Replacing the Future tense:
Eu vou ao cinema amanha.
1 am going to the cinema tomorrow.
(e) Historical Present:
Em 1 500 Pedro Alvares Cabral descobre o Brasil.
In 1500 Pedro Alvares Cabral discovers Brazil.
7.2.1.2
Conjugation
cantor
'to sing'
canto
cantos
canto
cantomos
canto/s
cantom
vender
'to sell'
vendo
vendes
vende
vendemos
vende/s
vendem
part/r
'to leave'
parto
partes
parte
pa rt/m os
part/s
partem
por
'to put'
ponho
poes
poe
pomos
pondes
poem
tu
ele, ela, voce
nos
(vos)
eles, elas, voces
Note: If the stem vowel in -ir verbs is an e or an o, it becomes i or u respect-
ively in the first person singular:
e to /
o to u
despir
eu d/spo
cobrir
eu cubro
mentir
eu m/nto
dormir
eu durmo
preferir
eu pref/ro
tossir
eu tusso
repetir
eu rep/to
seguir
eu s/go
servir
eu s/rvo
vestir
eu v/sto
Note: If the stem of the -ar verb ends in -c, -q or -g, these consonants change
into -qu, -c or -gu respectively when they are followed by an -e, in order
to preserve the original consonant sound of the stem:
ficar eu fiquei
cocar eu cocei
chegar eu cheguei
Note: If the stem of an -er or -ir verb ends in -c, -g or -gu, these consonants
change into -q and -j or -g respectively when they are followed by an -o or
an -a, also to preserve the original consonant sound of the stem:
veneer
fugir
erguer
eu venco
eu fujo
eu ergo
7.2. 1 .3 Irregular present
ser
estar
ter
hover 1
dar
sou, es, e, somos, sois, sao
estou, estas, esta, estamos, estais, estao
tenho, tens, tern, temos, tendes, tern
ha
dou, das, da, damos, dais, dao
ir vou, vais, vai, vamos, ides, vao
vir venho, vens, vem, vimos, vindes, vem
ver vejo, ves, ve, vemos, vedes, veem
dizer digo, dizes, diz, dizemos, dizeis, dizem
fazer faco, fazes, faz, fazemos, fazeis, fazem
trazer trago, trazes, traz, trazemos, trazeis, trazem
ouvir ouso, ouves, ouve, ouvimos, ouvis, ouvem
pedir peco, pedes, pede, pedimos, pedis, pedem
medir meijo, medes, mede, medimos, medis, medem
saber sei, sabes, sabe, sabemos, sabeis, sabem
1 Haver can only be used in the third person singular:
Hd muitas criangas pobres. There are many poor children.
Haver-de, however, can be used as an auxiliary verb expressing the intention of
doing something in the future:
Hei-de ler o livro que me recomendaste.
I shall read the book you recommended.
7.2.2 Present Perfect
7.2.2. 1 Meanings
Note that this tense is called 'Present Perfect' and not 'Perfect' in
Portuguese. Whereas in English this tense is more of an aspect or refers to
a state of completion following an action, in Portuguese it has the function
of a progressive tense describing an action or a process going on over some
length of time.
(a) Action which started in the past and has been developing over a period
of time, and which may or may not continue into the future:
Eu tenho estudado muito. I have been studying very hard.
(b) Continuity:
Ultimamente tenho-me interessado pela pohtica internacional.
Lately / have been interested in international politics.
(c) Repetition:
Eu tenho ido ao teatro.
I have been going to the theatre.
But the only exception is tenho dito, a formula used for closing a speech.
In this exceptional case, the Portuguese Present Perfect expresses a fully
completed action in the moment that has just passed, when the speech was
finished.
7.2.2.2 Conjugation (Present of ter + past participle of the verb)
cantor
vender
part/r
por
eu
tenho
tu
tens
ele, ela, voce
nos
tern
tern os
► cantado
vendido
partido
posto
(vos)
tendes
eles, elas, voces
tern
7.2.3 Imperfect
723 A Meanings
(a) Past action of a certain duration:
Quando a minha avo era nova nao havia televisao.
When my grandmother was young there was no television.
(b) Frequency or habit:
Todas as mannas eu ia de autocarro para a escola.
Every morning I used to go by bus to school.
(c) Two simultaneous actions:
Enquanto ele lia o jornal, ela preparava o jantar.
While he read the paper, she made the dinner. 73
(d) When describing background action and an incident, the background
action is always expressed in the Imperfect:
Eu dormia quando tu chegaste.
I was sleeping when you arrived.
Note: The progressive form estar a + infinitive can also describe a back-
ground action in the past:
Eu estava a dormir quando tu chegaste.
I was sleeping when you arrived.
instead of
Eu dormia quando tu chegaste.
(e) Polite request (in the sense of 'would' or 'could'):
Podia-me dizer as horas, por favor?
Could you tell me the time, please?
(f) Replacing the Conditional tense:
Se eu tivesse muito dinheiro, comprava um iate.
If I had a lot of money, / would buy a yacht.
7.2.3.2 Conjugation
cantor
vender
part/r
por
eu
cantovo
vend/o
part/o
punho
tu
cantavas
vend/os
part/os
punhos
ele, ela, voce
cantovo
vend/o
part/o
punho
nos
cantdvomos
vend/omos
part/omos
punhomos
(vos)
canto veis
vend/e/s
part/e/s
punhe/s
eles, elas, voces
canto warn
vend/am
part/am
punhom
7.2.3.3
ser
ter
vir
Irregular imperfect
era, eras, era, eramos, ereis, eram
tinha, tinhas, tinha, tfnhamos, tmheis, tinham
vinha, vinhas, vinha, vmhamos, vmheis, vinham
7.2.4 Preterite
72AA Meanings
(a) Completed action in the past:
Eu estudei portugues no ano passado.
I studied Portuguese last year.
(b) When describing background action and an incident, the Preterite is
always used to express the incident:
Eu dormia quando tu chegaste.
I was sleeping when you arrived.
7.2.4.2 Conjugation
cantor
vender
part/r
por
eu
cante/
vend/
part/
pus
tu
cantoste
vendeste
part/ste
puseste
ele, ela, voce
cantou
vendeu
part/'u
pos
nos
cantdmos
vendemos
pa rt/m os
pusemos
(vos)
cantostes
vendestes
pa rtistes
pusestes
eles, elas, voces
cantaram
venderom
pa rtiram
puseram
7.2.4.3 Irregular preterite
ser fui, foste, foi, fomos, fostes, foram
estar estive, estiveste, esteve, estivemos, estivestes, estiveram
ter tive, tiveste, teve, tivemos, tivestes, tiveram
haver houve
dar dei, deste, deu, demos, destes, deram
ir fui, foste, foi, fomos, fostes, foram
vir vim, vieste, veio, viemos, viestes, vieram
ver vi, viste, viu, vimos, vistes, viram
dizer disse, disseste, disse, dissemos, dissestes, disseram
fazer fiz, fizeste, fez, fizemos, fizestes, fizeram
querer quis, quiseste, quis, quisemos, quisestes, quiseram
saber soube, soubeste, soube, soubemos, soubestes, souberam
trazer trouxe, trouxeste, trouxe, trouxemos, trouxestes, trouxeram
7.2.4.4 Differences between the Preterite and the Present Perfect
In English we can use either the Simple Past or the Present Perfect to express
a completed action in the past:
Yesterday I studied hard.
I have studied hard.
In Portuguese, only the Preterite expresses a fully completed action in the
past. The Present Perfect expresses an action which began in the past, has
been developing over a period of time and may or may not continue into
the future (see 7.2.2.1):
Eu encontrei a Teresa na biblioteca.
I met Teresa in the library/I have met Teresa in the library.
Eu tenho encontrado a Teresa na biblioteca.
I have been meeting Teresa in the library (and I may still continue
meeting her in the library).
7.2.4.5
Differences between Preterite and Imperfect
(a) The Preterite expresses a past action limited by time while the Imperfect
expresses a past action with a certain duration and not limited in time:
Ontem a Carla levantou-se as oito horas.
Yesterday Carla got up at eight o'clock.
Dantes a Carla levantava-se as oito horas.
Carla used to get up at eight o'clock.
(b) The Preterite is used to express a single event, while the Imperfect
expresses an habitual action:
Quando vi o teu pai, perguntei-lhe por ti.
When I saw your father I asked (him) about you.
Quando via o teu pai, perguntava-lhe por ti.
Whenever I saw your father I would ask (him) about you.
7.2.5 Past Perfect and Pluperfect
7.2.5.1 Meanings
(a) Past action prior to another action in the past:
Eu tinha saido quando ela chegou.
I had left when she arrived.
Note: The Pluperfect is almost exclusively used in literary language. In
colloquial Portuguese, the Past Perfect is used instead:
O livro tinha-se tornado tao enfadonho que adormeci.
The book had become so boring that I fell asleep.
instead of
O livro tornara-se tao enfadonho que adormeci.
7.2.5.2 Conjugation
Past Perfect
eu
tinha
tu
tinhas
ele, ela, voce
tinha
nos
tinhamos
(vos)
tinheis
eles, elas, voces
tinham
cantor vender part/r por
cantado vendido partido posto
77
cantor
vender
part/r
por
Pluperfect
eu
cantoro
vendero
part/ro
pusero
tu
cantaras
venderos
part/ros
puseros
ele, ela, voce
cantoro
vendero
part/ro
pusero
nos
cantdramos
venderomos
pa rtiram os
puseromos
(vos)
cantdre/s
vendere/s
part/re/s
pusere/s
eles, elas, voces
cantorom
venderom
part/ram
puserom
7.2.5.3
Irregular pluperfect
ser fora, foras, fora, foramos, foreis, foram
dor dera, deras, dera, deramos, dereis, deram
k fora, foras, fora, foramos, foreis, foram
vir viera, vieras, viera, vieramos, viereis, vieram
fazer fizera, fizeras, fizera, fizeramos, fizereis, fizeram
7.2.6 Future
7.2.6.1
Meanings
(a) Future action, either definite or most probable:
Amanha telefonarei a Isabel.
/ w/7/ phone Isabel tomorrow.
(b) Uncertainty about present facts, usually expressed through a question:
Sera que esta a chover?
Do you think it is raining?
Bateram a porta. Sera o Filipe?
Someone has knocked at the door. Do you think it is Filipe?
Note: The Future is usually reserved for formal language, especially rules,
regulations and legislation. In colloquial Portuguese it is replaced by the
Present or the Present of ir + infinitive of the verb:
Amanha telefono a Isabel.
I'll phone Isabel tomorrow.
Amanha vou telefonar a Isabel.
I'm going to phone Isabel tomorrow.
instead of
Amanha telefonarei a Isabel.
7.2.6.2 Conjugation
cantor
vender
part/r
por
eu
cantare/
vender ei
parti re/*
pore/
tu
cantards
venderds
partirds
pords
ele, ela, voce
cantard
venderd
partird
pord
nos
cantaremos
venderemos
parti rem os
poremos
(vos)
cantare/s
vender e/s
partire/s
pore/s
eles, elas, voces
cantardo
venderdo
pa rtir do
pordo
7.2.6.3 Irregular future
dizer direi, diras, dira, diremos, direis, dirao
fazer farei, faras, fara, faremos, fareis, farao
trazer trarei, traras, trara, traremos, trareis, trarao
7.2.7 Future perfect
72.7 A Meanings
(a) Future action prior to another action in the future:
Quando eles chegarem, ja nos teremos almocado.
When they arrive, we w/7/ have had our lunch. 79
7
Verbs
(b) Uncertainty about past facts, usually expressed through a question:
Ja terd passado a chuva? W/7/ it have stopped raining?
Quern terd partido este copo? Who might have broken this glass?
7.2.7.2 Conjugation
cantor
vender
part/r
por
eu
terei
tu
teras
ele, ela, voce
nos
tera
teremos
> cantado
vendido
partido
posto
(vos)
tereis
eles, elas, voces
terao
7.2.8 Conditional
7.2.8.1
Meanings
(a) Uncertainty about past facts:
Quern seria aquele homem de chapeu preto?
Who could that man in the black hat be?
(b) Polite request implying wishing:
Gostaria que me desse a sua opiniao sobre este assunto.
/ would like you to give me your opinion on this matter.
(c) Condition of a fact that probably will not happen:
Se eu tivesse tempo, iria a praia.
If I had the time, / would go to the beach.
Note: The Conditional is usually replaced by the Imperfect in spoken or
less formal written language:
Se eu tivesse tempo, ia a praia.
If I had the time, / would go to the beach.
instead of
Se eu tivesse tempo, iria a praia.
7.2.8.2 Conjugation
cantor
vender
part/r
por
eu
cantar/a
vender/o
partir/o
por/o
tu
cantar/as
vender/os
partir/os
po r/os
ele, ela, voce
cantar/o
vender/o
partir/o
por/o
nos
cantar/amos
vender/omos
parti riamos
po r/omos
(vos)
cantar/e/s
vender/e/s
partir/e/s
por/e/s
eles, elas, voces
cantar/am
vender/am
partir/om
po r/om
7.2.8.3 Irregular conditional: verbs ending in -zer:
d/zer diria, dirias, diria, dinamos, dineis, diriam
fazer faria, farias, faria, fanamos, faneis, fariam
trazer traria, trarias, traria, tranamos, traneis, trariam
7.2.9 Conditional perfect
7.2.9 '.I Meanings
(a) Condition of a past action, which did not happen:
Eu teria tido uma boa nota se tivesse estudado.
I would have had a good mark if I had studied.
(b) Uncertainty about past facts:
Quern teria partido este copo?
Who could have broken this glass?
7.2.9.2 Conjugation
cantor
vender
part/r
por
eu
teria
tu
terias
ele, ela, voce
nos
teria
tehamos
> cantado
vendido
parti do
posto
(vos)
terieis
eles, elas, voces
teriam
Note: If any object pronouns are used with the Future or Conditional they
are placed between the stem and the ending of the verb and linked by
hyphens:
Ela escrever-me-a uma carta.
Ela escreve-/o-ia a mim.
She will write me a letter.
She would write it to me.
(See 5.1.2.1 for word order and also 5.1.2.4 for variant forms of direct
object pronouns.)
Subjunctive mood
The Indicative mood expresses real facts whereas the Subjunctive mood
expresses facts which are uncertain, doubtful, eventual or even unreal:
Hoje vamos fazer um piquenique, por isso espero que nao chova.
Today we are going for a picnic, so I hope it does not rain.
The use of the Subjunctive in Portuguese is far more frequent than in
English. In English, the Subjunctive mood usually expresses a hypothetical
situation. That is why it is often used in children's books where make-
believe plays an important role in the child's imagination.
Example:
Jack slipped into the giant's room without making a noise, as if he
were a little mouse.
Joao entrou no quarto do gigante sem fazer barulho, como
se fosse um rati n ho.
The tenses of the Subjunctive mood in Portuguese have regular conjuga-
tions, thus they should not present a problem for the foreign student/
learner. There are set circumstances, verbs and phrases that require its use.
Above all, remember that the Subjunctive in Portuguese is the mood that
expresses doubts and hypotheses. It is also linked to the idea of commands,
wishing, feeling and necessity. It normally appears in subordinate or
dependent clauses.
The mnemonic below may help you remember when to use the Subjunctive
in Portuguese:
WEIRD
W Wishes
E Emotion or feeling
I Imperatives and indirect commands
R Requests
D Doubt, uncertainty and hypotheses
The Subjunctive is used after the following verbs and expressions:
(a) Wishing:
oxala esperar que querer que
tomara que ser bom que/se pedir que
Deus queira que
(b) Emotion or feeling:
lamentar que estar contente que
ser pena que/se estar triste que
ser bom que/se estar satisfeito que
(c) Imperatives and indirect commands:
The Imperative form is usually borrowed from the Subjunctive, except for
the second person, tu and vos. It is also used after verbs that express an
indirect command:
querer que mandar que requerer que
recomendar que ordenar que exigir que
(d) Requests:
desejar que esperar que
agradecer que pedir que
(e) Doubt, uncertainty or hypotheses:
duvidar que pode ser que talvez
nao achar que ser provavel/improvavel que se
nao parecer que ser possfvel/impossfvel que caso
(f) Necessity:
ser preciso que ser necessario que ser importante que
(g) Other conjunctions and adverbs:
embora por muito que logo que
por pouco que enquanto
quern quer que sempre que
onde quer que como se
o que quer que assim que
quando
mesmo que
ainda que
para que
por mais que
por menos que
7.3. / Present subjunctive
73 A A Meanings
(a) Actions referring to a present situation:
E pena que ela esteja doente. It is a pity that she is
(b) Actions referring to a future situation:
Quando eu voltar, e bom que o teu quarto esteja arrumado!
When I get back, you'd better have your room tidy!
7.3. 1 .2 Conjugation
cantor
vender
part/r
por
eu
cante
vendo
parto
ponho
tu
cantes
vendos
partas
ponhos
ele, ela, voce
cante
vendo
parto
ponho
nos
cantemos
vendamos
pa rtom os
ponhomos
(vos)
cante/s
venda/s
parto/s
ponho/s
eles, elas, voces
cantem
vendam
pa rtom
ponhom
7.3. 1 .3 Irregular present subjunctive
ser seja, sejas, seja, sejamos, sejais, sejam
estar esteja, estejas, esteja, estejamos, estejais, estejam
haver haja
dar de, des, de, demos, deis, deem
ir va, vas, va, vamos, vades, vao
querer queira, queira, queira, queiramos, queirais, queiram
saber saiba, saibas, saiba, saibamos, saibais, saibam
7.3.2 Present perfect subjunctive
7.3.2.1 Meanings
(a) Actions referring to a past situation:
Espero que tenham feito uma boa viagem.
I hope you have had a good trip.
(b) Actions referring to a future situation:
E provavel que as cinco horas tenhas acabado o exame.
You probably w/7/ have finished your exam by five o'clock.
7.3.2.2 Conjugation
cantor
vender
part/r
por
eu
tenha
tu
tenhas
ele, ela, voce
nos
tenha
tenhamos
> cantado
vendido
parti do
posto
(vos)
tenhais
eles, elas, voces
tenham
7.3.3 Past subjunctive or imperfect subjunctive
7.3.3.1
Meanings
The Past Subjunctive, also known as Imperfect Subjunctive, is always used
in subordinate or dependent clauses. The verb in the main clause can be in
the Imperfect Indicative or in the Preterite, and each instance changes the
meaning of the sentence:
(a) The Imperfect in the main clause is used for actions referring to a
present or future situation, or even to a habitual situation in the past
(as explained in 7.2.3.1):
Eu queria que me desse o livro que esta na montra.
I would like you to give me the book in the window. 1
Eu queria que viesses almocar comigo hoje ou amanha.
I would like you to have lunch with me today or tomorrow. 1
Antigamente o meu pai pedia sempre que Ihe comprasse
o jornal.
In the past, my father always asked me to buy him the newspaper.
(b) The Preterite is used for actions referring to a past situation:
Eu quis que viesses almocar comigo ontem (mas tu nao vieste).
I wanted you to come to lunch with me yesterday (but you did not come). 1
(c) The Past Subjunctive is also used to express a condition to a fact that
probably will not happen. It can be used with the Conditional or the
Imperfect:
Se eu tivesse dinheiro compraria/comprava um barco.
If I had money I would buy a boat.
1 Note how in (a) and (b) the Portuguese Past or Imperfect Subjunctive is trans-
lated by the Infinitive in English.
7.3.3.2 Conjugation
cantor
vender
part/r
por
eu
cantosse
vendesse
part/sse
pusesse
tu
cantasses
vendesses
pa rtisses
pusesses
ele, ela, voce
cantosse
vendesse
part/sse
pusesse
nos
cantdssemos
vendessemos
part/ssemos
pusessemos
(vos)
cantdsse/s
vendesse/s
pa rt/sse/s
pusesse/s
eles, elas, voces
cantossem
vendessem
part/ssem
pusessem
7.3.4 Past perfect subjunctive
7.3.4.1 Meanings
(a) Past action prior to another past action:
Nao acreditei que ele tivesse dito a verdade.
I did not believe he had told the truth.
(b) Past condition to a past fact that did not happen:
Se tivesse tido muito dinheiro, teria comprado um aviao.
If / had had a lot of money, I would have bought a plane.
87
7.3.4.2 Conjugation
cantor
vender
part/r
por
eu
t/Vesse
tu
tivesses
ele, ela, voce
nos
tivesse
tivessemos
> cantado
vendido
parti do
posto
(vos)
tivesseis
eles, elas, voces
tivessem
7.3.5 Future subjunctive
7.3.5.1 Meanings
Eventuality of a future action:
Vem-me ajudar, se puderes. Help me, if you con. 1
The Future Subjunctive is used after words referring to a future or uncer-
tain action: se, quando, enquanto, logo que, assim que, como:
se quiseres if you wish
quando quiseres when you wish
enquanto quiseres as long as you wish
logo que/assim que quiseres as soon as you wish
como quiseres as you wish
Note: In Portuguese, the translation of the English 'whatever', 'whoever',
'whenever' and 'wherever' is followed by the Future Subjunctive:
Podes fazer o que quiseres. You can do whatever you w/sh. 1
1 Note how the Portuguese Future Subjunctive is translated by the Present Indicative
in English.
7.3.5.2 Conjugation
cantor
vender
part/r
por
eu
cantor
vender
part/r
puser
tu
cantares
venderes
part/res
puseres
ele, ela, voce
cantor
vender
part/r
puser
nos
cantormos
vendermos
pa rt/rmos
pusermos
(vos)
cantordes
venderdes
pa rtirdes
puserdes
eles, elas, voces
cantorem
venderem
part/rem
puserem
7.3.6 Future perfect subjunctive
7.3.6.1 Meaning
Future action prior to another action also in the future. 1 The Future
Subjunctive follows the words se, quando, logo que and assim que:
Se tiveres terminado quando eu chegar, vamos juntos ao
cinema.
If you have finished by the time I arrive, we will go to the cinema
together.
Quando tiver acabado o curso vou para Italia.
When / have finished my degree I will go to Italy.
Logo que/assim que tiver vendido o carro antigo compro
urn novo.
As soon as / have sold my old car I will buy a new one
1 Note how the Portuguese Future Perfect Subjunctive is usually translated by the
Present Perfect in English.
7.3.6.2 Conjugation
cantor
vender
part/r
por
eu
t/Ver
tu
tiveres
ele, ela, voce
nos
tiver
tivermos
> cantado
vendido
patido
posto
(vos)
tiverdes
eles, elas, voces
tiverem
Imperative mood
7.4. / Conjugation^
The Imperative mood expresses commands. In the affirmative, it has only
three persons (tu, nos, vos). In all other cases, including the negative,
commands are expressed by forms borrowed from the Present Subjunctive.
It is presented here conjugated together with the borrowed forms of the
Present Subjunctive (in parentheses) for easier consultation:
cantor
vender
part/r
por
Affirmative
eu
tu
canto
vende
parte
poe
voce
(cante)
(venda)
(parta)
(ponha)
nos
cantemos
vendomos
partomos
ponhomos
(vos)
canto/
vende/
part/
ponde
voces
(cantem)
(vendam)
(partam)
(ponham)
Negative
eu nao - - - -
tu nao (cantes) (vendas) (partas) (ponhas)
voce nao (cante) (venda) (parta) (ponha)
nos nao (cantemos) (vendamos) (partamos) (ponhamos)
(vos) nao (canteis) (vendais) (partais) (ponhais)
voces nao (cantem) (vendam) (partam) (ponham)
7.4.2 Irregular imperative
ser
se, sejamos, sede
estar
esti, estejamos, estai
ir
vai, vamos, ide
dar
da, demos, dai
dizer
diz, digamos, dizei
ler
le, leiamos, lede
ver
ve, vejamos, vede
fazer
faz, facamos, fazei
trazer
traz, tragamos, trazei
saber
sabe, saibamos, sabei
Infinitive
7.5. 1 Impersonal infinitive
The Impersonal Infinitive in the four conjugations ends in -ar, -er, -ir or
-or:
cantor vender part/r por
7.5.2 Personal infinitive
cantor
vender
part/r
por
eu
can tar
vender
parti r
por
tu
can tares
venderes
parti res
pores
ele, ela, voce
can tar
vender
parti r
por
nos
cantarm os
vendermos
parti rm os
pormos
(vos)
cantardes
venderdes
parti rdes
pordes
eles, elas, voces
cantarem
venderem
parti rem
porem
Note: With regular verbs, the Personal Infinitive and the Future Subjunctive
happen to have the same forms. This is not the case with irregular verbs
(e.g. fazer: tu fazeres/tu fizeres).
7.5.3 Although we can often use either the Impersonal or the Personal
Infinitive, the latter is preferred when indicating more clearly the person to
whom the Infinitive refers. Especially after ao ('when; on doing something')
and para ('for; in order to'), the Personal Infinitive is used to avoid ambi-
guity:
Ao abrir a porta, eles viram-me.
On opening the door they saw me. (Who opened the door - did
they or did I?)
Ao abrirem a porta, eles viram-me.
When they opened the door, they saw me.
Isto e para traduzir hoje.
This is to be translated today. (Who has to translate it today?)
Isto e para traduzires hoje.
This is for you to translate today.
| 7.5.4 | In colloquial Portuguese, the Personal Infinitive replaces a subjunc-
tive clause in the following situations:
para que + Subjunctive = para + Personal Infinitive
sem que + Subjunctive = sem + Personal Infinitive
Vim falar contigo para que me des um conselho.
Vim falar contigo para me dares um conselho.
I came to talk to you for some advice.
N6s saimos sem que e/es vissem.
Nos saimos sem e/es verem.
We left without being seen (by them).
Present
Present participle
cantor
vender
part/r
por
cantondo
vendendo
pa rtindo
pondo
The Present Participle is used in Brazilian Portuguese to express the
Progressive tenses. In European Portuguese, estar a/andar a + Infinitive is
preferred:
Eu estou a trabalhar. I am working.
Eu ando a estudar portugues. I am studying Portuguese.
instead of
Estou trabalhando.
Estou estudando portugues.
But when the English 'to be + -ing' is used to express a future action, it
cannot be translated with the Portuguese Progressive. The simple Present
tense is used instead:
Ele parte amanha. He is leaving tomorrow.
Eles ficam tres dias. They are staying three days.
Note: Contrary to English usage, the Portuguese gerund cannot act as a
noun. Where English uses the '-ing' form, Portuguese uses an Infinitive:
Viajar de aviao e caro. Travelling by plane is expensive. 93
Compound infinitive and compound present
participle
Compound Infinitive ter + Past Participle
('having' + Past Participle)
Compound Present Participle tendo + Past Participle
('having' + Past Participle)
The Compound Infinitive is normally used after a preposition (de, para,
por), while the Compound Present Participle never follows a preposition:
Depois de ter terminado o curso, a Isabel voltou para Portugal.
After having finished her degree, Isabel returned to Portugal.
Tendo terminado o curso, a Isabel voltou para Portugal.
Having finished her degree, Isabel returned to Portugal.
Past participle
cantor
vender
part/r
por
cantodo
vend/do
part/do
posto
7.8.1
Irregular past participle
A few verbs have an irregular Past Participle:
abrir aberto fazer feito
cobrir coberto pagar pago
dizer dito ver visto
escrever escrito vir vindo
Note: Some verbs have two Past Participles, one regular and one irregular.
The regular form is used when the auxiliary verbs is ter or haver, and the
irregular form when the auxiliary verb is ser or estar:
ter/haver
ser/estar
aceitar
aceitado
aceito/aceite
to accept
entregar
entregado
entregue
to hand over;
to deliver
expulsar
expulsado
expulso
to expel
matar
matado
morto
to kill
salvar
salvado
salvo
to save
soltar
soltado
solto
to release
acender
acendido
aceso
to light; to switch on
eleger
elegido
eleito
to elect
morrer
morrido
morto
to die
prender
prendido
preso
to arrest
romper
rompido
roto
to tear
suspender
suspendido
suspenso
to hang
exprimir
exprimido
expresso
to express
extinguir
extinguido
extinto
to extinguish
imprimir
imprimido
impresso
to print
Passive voice
ser (in required tense) + Past Participle + por
to be + Past Participle + by
7.9.1 The Passive Voice in Portuguese is not too different from its use
in English.
But in Portuguese, the Past Participle agrees in gender and in number with
the subject of the passive sentence, and the preposition por contracts with
the definite articles o, a, os, as: pelo, pela, pelos, pelas:
Os bombeiros apagam incendios.
Firefighters put out fires.
Os incendios sao apagados pelos bombeiros.
Fires are put out by firefighters.
Note: In the Passive Voice sentence:
• The direct object became the subject.
• The subject became the agent of the action introduced by the
preposition por.
• The past participle agrees in gender and number with the subject.
7.9.2 The Passive Voice can be used in all tenses. In principle, all
sentences in the Active Voice can be replaced by an equivalent with the
verb in the Passive Voice. The preference is determined by matters of style
and emphasis, just like in English. For that reason, some of the examples
below may seem somewhat strange to a native speaker. They are provided
here merely as an illustration.
Here are a few examples of Active Voice sentences followed by their Passive
Voice equivalent:
Present
Os bombeiros apagam o incendio.
The firefighters extinguish the fire.
O incendio e apagado pelos bombeiros.
The fire is extinguished by the firefighters.
Present Perfect
Ultimamente os bombeiros tern apagado muitos incendios.
Lately, the firefighters have been extinguishing (or: are extinguishing)
many fires.
Ultimamente, muitos incendios tern sido apagados pelos
bombeiros.
Lately, many fires have been extinguished (or: are being extinguished)
by the firefighters.
Imperfect
Antigamente, os bombeiros apagavam menos incendios.
In the past, the firefighters used to extinguish fewer fires.
Antigamente, menos incendios eram apagados pelos bombeiros.
In the past, fewer fires used to be extinguished by the firefighters.
Preterite
Os bombeiros apagaram muitos incendios.
The firefighters extinguished many fires.
Muitos incendios foram apagados pelos bombeiros.
Many fires were extinguished by the firefighters.
Pluperfect
O bombeiro apagara o incendio.
The firefighter had extinguished the fire.
O incendio fora apagado pelo bombeiro.
The fire had been extinguished by the firefighter.
Past Perfect
Os bombeiros tinham apagado muitos incendios.
The firefighters had extinguished many fires.
Muitos incendios tinham sido apagados pelos bombeiros.
Many fires had been extinguished by the firefighters.
Future
Os bombeiros apagarao todos os incendios.
The firefighters w/7/ extinguish all fires.
Todos os incendios serao apagados pelos bombeiros.
All fires w/7/ be extinguished by the firefighters.
Conditional
Os bombeiros apagariam todos os incendios.
The firefighters would extinguish all fires.
Todos os incendios seriam apagados pelos bombeiros.
All fires would be extinguished by the firefighters.
Present Subjunctive
E imperativo que os bombeiros apaguem todos os incendios
It is imperative that the firefighters extinguish all fires.
E imperativo que todos os incendios sejam apagados pelos
bombeiros.
It is imperative that all fires be extinguished by the firefighters.
Past Subjunctive
Era urgente que os bombeiros apagassem todos os incendios.
It was urgent for the firefighters to extinguish all fires.
Era urgente que todos os incendios fossem apagados pelos
bombeiros.
It was urgent for all fires to be extinguished by the firefighters.
Past Perfect Subjunctive
Todos esperavam que os bombeiros tivessem apagado o
incendio.
Everyone hoped that the firefighters had extinguished the fire.
Todos esperavam que o incendio tivesse sido apagado pelos
bombeiros.
Everyone hoped that the fire had been extinguished by the
firefighters.
Future Subjunctive
Se os bombeiros apagarem o incendio, nao havera mais perigo.
If the firefighters extinguish the fire, there will be no further danger.
Se o incendio for apagado pelos bombeiros, nao havera
mais perigo.
If the fire is extinguished by the firefighters, there will be no further
danger.
Personal Infinitive
E facil os bombeiros apagarem o incendio.
It is easy for the firefighters to extinguish the fire.
E facil o incendio ser apagado pelos bombeiros.
It is easy for the fire to be extinguished by the firefighters.
Auxiliary verbs
The verbs ter, haver, ser, estar, ir, vir and many others can be used as auxil-
iary verbs:
Eu tenho feito muito exerdcio.
/Ve been doing a lot of exercise.
Temos de ir as compras.
We must go shopping.
Havemos-de ir a Paris no Verao.
We shall go to Paris next summer.
Ele foi comido por um tubarao.
He was eaten by a shark.
Eu estava a ouvir musica.
I was listening to music.
O navio vai parti r.
The boat is going to leave.
Viemos visitar-te.
We came to see you.
ter
haver
ser
estar
ir
vir
INDICATIVE
Present
tenho
hei
sou
estou
vou
venho
tens
has
es
estas
vais
vens
tern
ha
e
esta
vai
vem
temos
havemos
somos
estamos
vamos
vimos
tendes
have is
sois
estais
ides
vindes
tern
hao
sao
estao
vao
vem
Imperfect
tinha
havia
era
estava
ia
vinha
tinhas
havias
eras
estavas
ias
vinhas
tinha
havia
era
estava
ia
vinha
tmhamos
haviamos
eramos
estavamos
famos
vinhamos
tfnheis
havieis
ereis
estaveis
feis
vmheis
tinham
haviam
eram
estavam
iam
vinham
Preterite
tive
houve
fi ii
TUI
estive
fi ii
TUI
vim
tiveste
houveste
foste
estiveste
foste
vieste
teve
houve
TOI
esteve
TOI
veio
iivemos
nouvemos
fomos
Apf 1 \//""\ KV> AC
estivemos
fomos
viemos
tivestes
houvestes
fostes
estivestes
fostes
viestes
tiveram
houveram
foram
estiveram
foram
vieram
Pluperfect
tivera
houvera
fora
estive ra
fora
viera
tiveras
houveras
foras
estive ras
foras
vie ras
tivera
houvera
fora
estive ra
fora
viera
tiveramos
houveramos
foram os
estiveramos
foramos
vieramos
tivereis
houvereis
foreis
estivereis
foreis
viereis
tiveram
houveram
foram
estiveram
foram
vieram
Future
terei
haverei
serei
estarei
irei
virei
teras
have ras
seras
estaras
iras
viras
tera
havera
sera
e star a
ira
vira
teremos
haveremos
seremos
estaremos
iremos
viremos
tereis
havereis
sereis
estareis
ireis
vireis
terao
haverao
serao
estarao
irao
virao
Conditional
ten a
haveria
seria
estaria
iria
viria
terias
navenas
serias
estanas
irias
virias
teria
haveria
seria
estaria
iria
viria
tenamos
havenamos
senamos
estanamos
inamos
vinamos
teneis
haveneis
seneis
estaneis
ineis
vineis
teriam
haveriam
seriam
estariam
iriam
viriam
SUBJUNCTIVE
Present
tenha
haja
seja
tenhas
hajas
sejas
tenha
haja
seja
tenhamos
hajamos
sejamos
tenhais
L.\— 1 II 1 Cl 1 o
haiais
1 1 Cl 1 Cl 1 J
sejais
tenham
UN-* 1 II 1 Cll 1 1
haiam
1 1 Cl 1 Cl 1 1 1
sejam
Imberfect
tivesse
houvesse
fosse
tivesses
houvesses
fosses
tivesse
houvesse
fosse
tivessemos houvessemos
fossemos
tivesseis
houvesseis
fosseis
tivessem
houvessem
fossem
Future
tiver
houver
for
tiveres
houveres
fores
tiver
houver
for
tivermos
houvermos
formos
tiverdes
houverdes
fordes
tiverem
houverem
forem
IMPERATIVE
Affirmative
tern
se
esteja
va
venha
estejas
vas
venhas
esteja
va
venha
estejamos
vamos
venhamos
estejais
vades
venhais
estejam
vao
venham
estivesse
fosse
viesse
estivesses
fosses
viesses
estivesse
fosse
viesse
estivessemos
fossemos
viessemos
estivesseis
fosseis
viesseis
estivessem
fossem
viessem
estiver
for
vier
estiveres
fores
vieres
estiver
for
vier
estivermos
formos
viermos
estiverdes
fordes
vierdes
estiverem
forem
vierem
esta
vai
vem
(tenha) (haja) (seja) (esteja) (va) (venha)
tenhamos hajamos
tende havei
(ten ham) (hajam)
Negative
sejamos estejamos
sede estai
(sejam) (estejam)
vamos venhamos
ide vinde
(vao) (venham)
tenhas
hajas
sejas
estejas
vas
venhas
tenha
haja
seja
esteja
va
venha
tenhamos
hajamos
sejamos
estejamos
vamos
venhamos
tenhais
hajais
sejais
estejais
vades
venhais
tenham
hajam
sejam
estejam
vao
venham
INFINITIVES
Impersonal Infinitive
ter
haver
ser
estar
ir
vir
Personal Infinitive
ter
haver
ser
estar
ir
vir
teres
have res
seres
estares
ires
vires
ter
haver
ser
estar
ir
vir
termos
havermos
sermos
estarmos
irmos
virmos
terdes
haverdes
serdes
estardes
irdes
virdes
terem
have rem
serem
estarem
irem
virem
PARTICIPLES
Present Participle
tendo
havendo
sendo
estando
indo
vindo
Past Participle
tido
havido
sido
estado
ido
vindo
7.1 I
Impersonal, unipersonal and defective verbs
7.1 I.I Impersonal verbs
Impersonal verbs do not have a subject and are invariably used in the third
person singular. They are usually related to nature:
amanhecer
anoitecer
chover
chuviscar
nevar
to dawn
to grow dark
to rain
to drizzle
to snow
relampejar
saraivar
trovejar
ventar
to lighten
to hail
to thunder
to storm
7.1 1.2 Unipersonal verbs
Unipersonal verbs are only used in the third person singular or the third
person plural:
acontecer to happen ganir to whine (a dog)
constar to be rumoured ladrar to bark
convir to be convenient zumbir to buzz
galopar to gallop zurrar to bray
7.1 1.3 Defective verbs
Defective verbs are not conjugated in all tenses. There are two groups of
defective verbs.
7. 1 1.3.1 Some verbs such as abolir, aturdir, banir, colorir, demolir,
emergir, and imergir are not conjugated in:
• first person singular and plural of the Present Indicative;
• Present Subjunctive;
• third person singular of the Imperative;
• first and second person plural of the Imperative.
7. 1 1 .3.2 Some verbs, such as adequar, falir, precaver-se and reaver are not
conjugated in:
• first, second and third persons singular of the Present Indicative;
• third person plural of the Present Indicative;
• Present Subjunctive;
• Imperative, except in the second person plural.
Reflexive verbs 6
eu
lavo-me
nos 1
lavamo-nos
tu
lavas-te
(vos)
lavais-vos
ele, ela, voce
lava-se
eles, elas, voces
lavam-se
1 When the reflexive pronoun is placed after the second person plural of the verb,
the verb loses its final -s (e.g. nos lavamos = nos lavamo-nos).
7.12.1 Position of the reflexive pronoun
7. 1 2. 1 . 1 The reflexive pronoun is usually placed after the verb (linked to
it by a hyphen) except in negative and interrogative sentences, after
conjunctions, prepositions or relative clauses (see 5.1.2.1 and 5.1.2.2).
7. 1 2. 1 .2 When the verb with the reflexive pronoun stands with an auxil-
iary, the pronoun can follow the main verb or the auxiliary (more
colloquial) : B
Posso sentar-me aqui? May I sit here?
Posso-me sentar aqui? Can I sit here?
7. 1 2. 1 .3 In the Indicative Future or Conditional, the reflexive pronoun is
placed between the stem and the ending of the verb, with each part sepa-
rated by hyphens: 6
Future
Future Perfect
Conditional
Conditional Perfect
lavar-me-ei
ter-me-ei lavado
lavar-me-ia
ter-me-ia lavado
lavar-te-as
ter-te-as lavado
lavar-te-ias
ter-te-ias lavado
lavar-se-a
ter-se-a lavado
lavar-se-ia
ter-se-ia lavado
lavar-nos-emos
ter-nos-emos
lavar-nos-
ter-nos-iamos
lavado
famos
lavado
lavar-vos-eis
ter-vos-eis lavado
lavar-vos-ieis
ter-vos-ieis lavado
lavar-se-ao
ter-se-ao lavado
lavar-se-iam
ter-se-iam lavado
verbs
7. 1 2. 1 .4 The reflexive pronouns can be supplemented with um ao outro,
uma a outra or uns aos outros, to avoid confusion:
Estes peixes comem-se.
These fish are edible, or These fish eat each other.
Estes peixes comem-se uns aos outros.
These fish eat each other.
7.12.2 Here are the Infinitives of some of the most commonly used
reflexive verbs:
achar-se
to find oneself
banhar-se
to bathe
amar-se
to love each other
barbear-se
to shave
apaixonar-se
to fall in love
chamar-se
to be called
beijar-se
to kiss each other
lavar-se
to wash
deitar-se
to go to bed, to lie down
sentar-se
to sit down
levantar-se
to stand up, to get up
sentir-se
to feel
pentear-se
to comb one's hair
voltar-se
to turn around
105
Changing vowel sounds in verbal conjugation
In many Portuguese verbs, the sound of the stem vowel changes in the
Present Indicative, Present Subjunctive and the Imperative:
Present Indicative Present Subjunctive Imperative
First conjugation (-ar verbs)
open
lovo
open
lave
-
-
open
lavas
open
laves
open
lava
open
lava
open
lave
open
lave
lavamos
lavemos
lavemos
lavais
laveis
lavai
open
lavam
open
lavem
open
lavem
ote: In the first conju^
Ration, the stem vowel is
closed in al
1 other tenses.
Second conjugation (-er verbs)
closed
devo
closed
deva
-
-
open
deves
closed
devas
open
deve
open
deve
closed
deva
closed
deva
devemos
devamos
devamos
deveis
devais
devei
open
devem
closed
devam
closed
devam
Third conjugation (-ir verbs)
u
durmo
u
durma
open
dormes
u
durmas
open
dorme
open
dorme
u
durma
u
durma
dormimos
u
durmamos
u
durmamos
dormis
u
durmais
dormi
open
dormem
u
durmam
u
durmam
Note: In the first, second and third conjugations, the stem vowel is
unstressed in all other tenses.
Adverbs
Uses of the adverb
Adverbs can act as modifiers of a verb, an adjective, another adverb or a
whole sentence:
Ontem fui a Lisboa.
I went to Lisbon yesterday.
Ele e bem simpatico.
He is quite nice.
El as foram muito depressa.
They went very quickly.
Infelizmente choveu o dia todo.
Unfortunately it rained all day long.
Adverbs are invariable: that is, they do not vary according to the gender,
number or person of the word they are modifying.
Adverbs can be used to express:
(a) time: ontem ('yesterday'), hoje ('today'), amanha ('tomorrow'), antes
('before'), depois ('after'), agora ('now'), ja ('already', 'straight away'),
logo ('later'), cedo ('early'), tarde ('late'), entao ('then'), ainda ('yet',
'still'), enfim ('at last'), breve ('soon'), sempre ('always'), de vez em
quando ('once in a while').
(b) place: aqui, ca ('here'), ai, ali, la, acola, ('there'), perto ('near'), longe
('far'), diante, a frente de ('in front of), atras, detras ('behind'), acima
('above'), em cima ('on'), por cima ('over'), abaixo ('below'), em
baixo, por baixo ('under'), dentro ('in', 'inside'), fora ('out, outside'),
onde ('where'), algures ('somewhere').
g Note: Some adverbs of place are used with reference to the position of the
Adverbs speaker and/or the hearer:
aqui nearness to the speaker
af nearness to the hearer
ali distance from both speaker and hearer
ca nearness to the speaker without reference to
the position of the hearer
la, acola, alem distance from the speaker without reference to
the position of the hearer
(c) manner: bem ('well'), mal ('badly'), assim ('thus'), depressa ('quickly'),
devagar ('slowly') and most adverbs ending in -mente (see 8.2).
(d) intensity: pouco ('little'), muito ('very'), menos ('less'), demasiado
('too much'), quanto? ('how much?'), tanto ('as much'), tao ('so'),
mais ('more'), demais ('too much', 'too many'), bastante ('enough'),
quase ('almost').
(e) doubt: talvez ('perhaps', 'maybe'), por acaso ('by chance'),
possivelmente ('possibly'), provavelmente ('probably').
(f) negation: nao ('no'), nem ('nor'), nunca ('never'), jamais ('never ever').
(g) affirmation: sim ('yes'), certamente ('certainly'), realmente ('really').
(h) exclusion: so, somente ('only'), unicamente ('merely'), simplesmente
('simply'), exclusivamente ('exclusively'), apenas ('just', 'hardly').
(i) interrogation: onde? ('where?'), como? ('how?'), porque? ('why?'),
quando? ('when?').
|2J Adverbs in -mente
In Portuguese, many adverbs are formed by adding the suffix -mente ('-ly')
to the adjective:
normal normalmente normal normally
But adjectives ending in -o in the masculine singular change to the femi-
nine singular before the suffix -mente is added:
lento > lenta lentamente slow slowly
There are two important characteristics of adverbs in -mente:
(a) Adverbs in -mente have no accents, even if the adjective from which
they are formed does:
facil facilmente easy easily
(b) When two or more adverbs are used in the same sentence, only the last
one takes the suffix -mente:
Ele guiava lenta e cuidadosamente.
He was driving slowly and carefully.
JjJJJ Other adverbs
The adjectives muito ('a lot'), pouco ('little'), demasiado ('too much'),
melhor ('better') and pior ('worse') can also be adverbs, if qualifying a verb:
Ela trabalha muito. She works a lot.
Ele come demasiado. He eats too much.
Pouco se sabe deste compositor. Little is known of this composer.
Adverbs may also consist of more than one word:
preposition + noun sem duvida doubtlessly
preposition + adjective ao certo exactly
preposition + adverb pelo menos at least
two adverbs nunca mais never again
Position
8.4. 1 Usually adverbs are placed before the adjective or after the verb
they modify:
Que festa tao an i mad a! What a lively party!
Ela chorou desesperadamente. She cried desperately.
8.4.2 Adverbs of time and place can either precede or follow the verb
they modify:
Ele chegou hoje. He arrived today.
Hoje quero ficar aqui. Today I want to stay here.
8.4.3 Adverbs of negation always precede the verb:
Ela nunca tinha feito isso. She had never done that.
Nao ha pao.
Degree
There is no bread.
8.5. I Comparative
comparative of superiority
comparative of equality
comparative of inferiority
mais + adverb + (do) que
more . . . than
tao + adverb + como/quanto
as ... as
menos + adverb + (do) que
less . . . than
Eu vivo mais longe do que tu.
I live further away than you.
Ela vive tao longe quanto eu.
She lives as far away as I do.
Tu vives menos longe do que nos.
You live closer than we do.
Note: There are adverbs with special comparative forms:
bem
>
melhor
well
better
mal
>
pior
badly
worse
muito
>
mais
a lot
more
pouco
>
menos
little
less
Adverbs can be compared using o mais + adverb + possivel:
Vou o mais depressa possivel. I'll go as fast as I can.
8.5.2
Superlative
Adverb (minus final vowel) + -issimo
Cantas muitissimo bem. You sing very well.
Ela mora pertfssimo. She lives very near.
9.1
Co-ordinating conjunctions
Co-ordinating conjunctions link clauses of identical grammatical function:
Ela brinca e eu estudo. She plays and I study.
Ela brinca mas eu estudo. She plays but I study.
The two elements of these clauses are independent of each other and could
even be separated by punctuation:
Ela brinca, eu estudo. She plays, I study.
Ela brinca. Eu estudo. She plays. I study.
9.1.1 Copulative conjunctions
e and
nao so . . . mas tambem not only . . . but also
nem . . . nem neither . . . nor
tanto . . . como both . . . and
0 Joao e alto e magro.
Joao is tall and thin.
Ele nao tern nem dinheiro nem trabalho.
He has neither money nor job.
Vim nao so porque me pediste mas tambem porque eu
queria ver este filme.
1 came not only because you asked me to but also because I wanted
to see this film.
Conjunctions
Tanto a Helena como o irmao ja sabem ler.
Both Helena and her brother can already read.
9.1.2
Adversative conjunctions
mas
porem
but
however
todavia
contudo
yet
nevertheless
Tropecei mas nao caf.
I stumbled but I did not fall.
O dia estava bonito, poremlcontudoltodavia nao fui passear.
It was a lovely day, however/yet/ nevertheless I did not go for a walk.
9./. 3 Disjunctive conjunctions
ou
ou
ou
or
either ... or
quer . . . quer whether ... or
nem . . . nem neither . . . nor
Vens ou ficas?
Are you coming or are you staying?
Ou comes peixe ou comes carne.
You eat either fish or meat.
Quer tu queiras quer nao, tens de te ir embora.
Whether you want to or not, you must leave.
9.1.4 Conclusive conjunctions
portanto therefore; so
logo therefore; so
por isso therefore; so
assim thus
por consequencia consequently
por conseguinte consequently
pelo que consequently
O professor esta doente, por isso nao veio a escola.
The teacher is sick, so he did not come to school.
12
Note: Conclusive conjunctions are normally placed at the beginning of the
clause they introduce.
Subordinating conjunctions
Subordinating conjunctions link two clauses necessarily dependent on each
other:
Eu estava a ler quando ele entrou.
I was reading when he came in.
9.2. / Causal conjunctions
porque
pois
que
como
because
because
because
as
visto que seeing that
ja que since
uma vez que since
Nao telefonei porque nao tive tempo.
I did not call because I did not have the time.
Como estava a chover ficamos em casa.
As it was raining we stayed in.
9.2.2 Concessive conjunctions
embora although mesmo que even if; even though
apesar de despite; in spite of por mais que as much as
ainda que even if; even though nem que not even if
Apesar de estar um dia bonito nao fui passear.
Despite/in spite of it being a lovely day I did not go for a walk.
Por mais que tentes, nao me convences a ir de aviao.
As much as you try, you will not convince me to go by plane.
9.2.3 Conditional conjunctions
se if
caso if
desde que provided that
a menos que provided that
excepto se unless
salvo se unless
a nao ser que unless
Conjunctions
A nao ser que chova, fazemos um piquenique amanha.
Unless it rains, we will have a picnic tomorrow.
Note: Conditional conjunctions take the verb either in the Infinitive or in
the Subjunctive.
9.2.4 Final conjunctions
para que so that
a fim de que in order to
Aproxima-te para que eu te possa ver melhor.
Come closer so that I can see you better.
Note: These conjunctions must be followed by the Subjunctive.
9.2.5
Temporal conjunctions
quando
when
antes que
before
apenas
as soon as
depois que
after
mal
as soon as; hardly
sempre que
whenever
logo que
as soon as
desde que
since
assim que
as soon as
enquanto
while
Quando eu cheguei, ele ja estava em casa.
When I arrived, he was already home.
Enquanto ela Ma o jornal, o marido via televisao.
While she was reading the paper, her husband watched television.
9.2.6
Comparative conjunctions
como as bem como as well as
que nem as assim como as well as
... do que . . . than como se as if
tanto quanto as much as; as far as
Sei mais agora do que sabia ha uns anos atras.
I know more now than I knew a few years ago.
Ele fala como se fosse meu pai.
He speaks as if he were my father.
9.2.7 Consecutive conjunctions
tal que
tanto que
de tal maneira que
de tal modo que
in such a way that
Subordinating
conjunctions
O rapaz caiu de tal maneira que teve que ser levado para o
hospital.
The boy fell in such a way that he had to be taken to hospital.
9.2.5 Integrating conjunctions
que that se if
A Maria disse que tambem vinha a festa do Joao.
Maria said that she was also coming to John's party.
Note: Subordinating conjunctions are placed at the beginning of the clause
they introduce.
Chapter 10
Prepositions
Most commonly used prepositions
a
to
em
in
ante
before
entre
between
apos
after
excepto
except
ate
until
para
for; to
com
with
perante
in the preser
conforme
according to
por
by
consoante
according to
salvo
except
contra
against
segundo
according to
de
of
sem
without
desde
from
sob
under
durante
during
sob re
over
Prepositional phrases
abaixo de
below
em vez de
instead; in place of
por baixo de
under
apesar de
despite; in spite of
acima de
above
a fim de
in order to
por cima de
on; over
antes de
before
em cima de
on; on top of
depois de
after
ao lado de
next to
diante de
in front of
alem de
beyond
atras de
behind
Verbs
acerca de
about
longe de
away from
TO 1 1 0 \A/ P» H hv 3
preposition
do reaor ue
ar ouna
airaves ae
-f- V\ \~ f~\ 1 ink
inrougn
em torno de
around
dentro de
inside; in
perto de
near
a respeito de
concerning; about
proximo de
near; close to
junto de
near
para com
towards
de acordo
in accordance
com
with; accordingly
por entre
through; amongst
fora de
outside; out of
ao longo de
along
em frente de
in front of
de cima de
from the top of
gracas a
thanks to
ao pe de
next to; nearby
Contraction of preposition + article or pronoun
See 3.4 on contraction of the definite article, 3.8 on contraction of the
indefinite article, and 5.3.2 and 5.3.3 on demonstratives combined with
prepositions.
Verbs followed by a preposition 6
olhar para to look at
ass i stir a
to attend;
to watch
encontrar-se to meet
com
casar-se com to marry
entrar em to go into; to enter
chegar a to arrive at; to reach
ir a/para to go to
ir de to go by (transport)
mudar de to change from vir a/para to come to
sorrir para to smile at vir de to come by (transport)
rir de to laugh at
I 17
Some verbs followed by a preposition take a verb in the Infinitive:
ajudar a to help to gostar de to like to
come^ar a to start to; to begin to pensar em to think about
acabar de to finish; to have just pedir para to ask to
lembrar-se de to remember to precisar de to need to
esquecer-se de to forget to
Ajude-me a lavar o carro.
Help me wash the car.
0 Antonio acaba de sair.
Antonio has just left.
Voce esqueceu-se de apagar a luz.
You forgot to turn off the light.
Gosto de aprender portugues.
1 like learning Portuguese.
Peco-lhe para prestar atencao.
I am asking you to pay attention.
Preciso de ir ao supermercado. B
I need to go to the supermarket.
Chapter I I
Additional notes on
Portuguese usage
m| Gente/a gente
Gente means 'people' and it may correspond to pessoas. It takes a verb in
the third person singular:
Aonde vai aquela gente toda?
Where are all those people going?
O cafe estava cheio de gente.
The cafe was full of people.
A gente do Porto e muito simpatica.
The people of Oporto are very nice.
A gente may be used in the sense of nos in very colloquial speech. It is
followed by a verb in the third person singular: 6
- Aonde e que voces vao?
Where are you going?
- A gente vai ao cinema. (Nos vamos ao cinema.)
We're going to the cinema.
Q Tudo/todo
Tudo is invariable and means 'everything' or 'all'. It can be used with isto,
isso and aquilo but never with a noun:
Tens que comer tudo. You must eat everything.
Tens que comer isso tudo. You must eat it all.
1 1
Additional
notes on
Portuguese
Todo is variable (todo/a/os/as), agreeing in gender and number with the
noun it qualifies. It means 'all' or 'every' and is never used with isto, isso
or aquilo:
Tens que comer as batatas todas.
You must eat all the potatoes.
Note: The degree of emphasis is increased if todo/a/os/as is placed imme-
diately after the verb:
Tens que comer todas as batatas.
You must eat every single potato.
Por/para
Both por and para can be translated as 'for' but with different meanings:
(a) Por is used to convey the idea of:
Exchange (for)
Paguei € I pelo cafe.
I paid € I for the coffee.
Substitution (for)
Vou trocar estes sapatos pretos por uns castanhos.
I am going to change these black shoes for some brown ones.
Duration (for)
Por quanto tempo vais ficar em Italia?
(For) How long are you going to stay in Italy?
Por can also be translated as 'through' or 'by':
Route (through)
Vim para casa pelo parque porque estava um dia bonito.
I came home through the park because it was a beautiful day.
Process or method (through; by)
Passe a batatas pelo passador e depois adicione o leite.
Press the potatoes through the sieve and then add the milk.
Por aviao.
By air mail.
Note: Remember that the preposition por contracts with the definite article
(see 3.4.1.4).
(b) Para conveys the idea of
Destination, purpose, intention
Isto e para si.
This is for you.
E uma maquina para fazer pao.
It is a machine to make bread.
E para voce comer pao fresco todos os dias.
It is for you to eat fresh bread every day.
A/para
Both a and para convey the idea of movement towards, but a implies a
short stay whereas para implies a relatively long or permanent stay: B
Eu vou ao Brasil em viagem de negocios.
I am going to Brazil on business (and I am coming back soon).
Eu vou para o Brasil.
I am going to Brazil (one assumes that I do not know when I am
coming back).
Desde . . . ate/de ... a
Desde and de are used to express the starting point of a period of time or
space:
Venho desde Leiria com os pneus em baixo.
Since Leiria my tyres have been going down.
De Maio em diante o tempo vai melhorar.
From May onwards, the weather is going to improve.
The endpoint of this period of time or space is expressed by ate or a, where
desde combines with ate and de combines with a:
desde Janeiro ate Junho from January to June
1 1
Additional
notes on
Portuguese
de Janeiro a Junho
desde as 9 ate as 5
or
das 9 as 5
desde Braga ate Guimaraes
from 9 to 5
from Braga to Guimaraes
de Braga a Guimaraes
The difference between usage is that desde ... ate is more emphatic:
O que? Ele foi mesmo a pe desde Braga ate Guimaraes?
What? Did he really walk from Braga to Guimaraes?
Proximo/seguinte
Both proximo and seguinte mean 'next'. However, the difference between
them lies in their point of reference: proximo means 'next' in relation to
the present moment, whereas seguinte means 'next' in relation to a given
point in the past or future.
Therefore, proximo is used in direct speech and seguinte is normally used
in reported speech (and can be translated as 'the following'):
No proximo mes nao ha aulas.
There are no classes next month.
Em Julho avisei que nao havia aulas no mes seguinte.
In July I said that there would be no classes the following month.
Tao/tanto
Tao is invariable and can be used before an adjective or an adverb:
Esta paisagem e tao bonita! This landscape is so pretty!
Nao comas tao depressa! Don't eat so quickly!
Tanto is variable when placed before a noun (it agrees with the noun in
gender and number: tanto/a/os/as) and invariable when placed after a verb
as it refers to intensity:
Ele recebeu tantos presentes! He got so many presents!
Gosto tanto daquele vestido! I like that dress so much!
Affirmative/negative
The affirmative is usually expressed by sim, although this is rarely used on
its own. An affirmative answer to a question is given by the verb, which
may or may not be preceded or followed by sim as reinforcement:
Vais am an ha? Are you going tomorrow?
Vou. Yes.
Sim, vou. Yes, I'm going.
Vou, vou. (less formal) Yes, I'm going.
The negative is usually expressed by nao (simple negative), nem (reinforced
negative), nunca or jamais (absolute negative; the latter is more commonly
used in literary language):
O Pedro nao viu esse filme. Pedro has not seen that film.
O Pedro nem viu esse filme. Pedro has not even seen that film.
O Pedro nunca viu esse filme. Pedro never saw that film.
O Pedro jamais viu esse filme. Pedro never ever saw that film.
Ainda/ja
Ainda usually means 'still', in statements, questions and answers; ainda nao
means 'not yet'. Ja means 'already'; ja nao means 'not anymore'.
Ainda ha pao?
Sim, ainda ha algum.
Nao, ja nao ha nenhum.
Ja ha pao?
Sim, ja ha.
Nao, ainda nao ha.
Is there still some bread left?
Yes, there's still some.
No, there is none anymore.
Is there already some bread?
Yes, there's already some.
No, there is none yet.
1 1
Additional
notes on
Portuguese
1 1. 10
de
Prepositions of time
aos domingos
as 7 horas
a tarde, a noite
de manha, de tarde,
de noite 1
das 9 as 5
em no sab ado passado
em Junho
no Natal
na Primavera
para as 5 para as 7
on Sundays
at seven o'clock
in the afternoon, in the evening,
in the/at night
in the/during the morning; during
the afternoon; during the night
from 9 to 5
last Saturday
in June
at Christmas
in Spring
at 5 to 7 (i.e. 6.55 a.m.)
1 We can say a tarde or de tarde, a noite or de noite but we can only say de manha.
Note: Remember that the prepositions de, a and em are contracted with
the definite article (see 3.4).
Prepositions with means of transport
de carro, autocarro, B by car, bus, underground,
metropolitan© 8 (metro), coach, taxi, tram, boat,
camioneta, B taxi, electrico, B plane, train, donkey
barco, aviao, comboio, B burro
a pe, cavalo on foot, horseback
But em is used when the means of transport is specified:
no carro do meu pai in my father's car
no autocarro n° 52 in the number 52 bus
no comboio das I I horas on the I I o'clock train
no cavalo da minha prima on my cousin's horse
Word order (See also 5. 1 .2.2)
1 1. 1 2. 1 Pronouns and verbs*
Non-subject pronouns are usually placed after the verb, linked to it by a
hyphen:
Ela escreveu-me uma carta.
She wrote me a letter.
Ela telefonou-me e escreveu-me uma carta. B
She phoned me and wrote me a letter.
Ela nao telefonou, mas/contudo/porem/no entanto
escreveu-me uma carta.
She did not phone but wrote me a letter.
Note: With compound tenses, pronouns are placed after the auxiliary verb:
Ela tinha-me escrito uma carta. B She had written me a letter.
Note: With the Future Indicative or the Conditional pronouns are placed
between the stem and the ending:
Ela escrever-me-a uma carta. B She will write me a letter.
Ela escrever-me-ia uma carta. B She would write me a letter.
But pronouns are placed before the verb in the following cases:
(a) In negative sentences:
Ela nao me escreveu uma carta.
She did not write me a letter.
(b) In sentences beginning with todo, tudo, muito, pouco, alguem, cada
qual, qualquer, outro, tal, tanto, quanto:
Alguem me escreveu uma carta.
Someone wrote me a letter.
Tanto me faz ir ao Japao como a China.
I do not mind going to Japan or China.
(c) In sentences beginning with adverbs:
Ja me escreveu uma carta.
She has already written me a letter. 125
1 1
Additional
notes on
Portuguese
(d) In subordinate clauses:
Disseram-me que ela me tinha escrito uma carta.
They told me that she had written me a letter.
1 1.12.2
Possessive pronouns and nouns
Possessive pronouns are usually placed before the noun:
O meu carro e branco. My car is white.
But possessive pronouns are placed after the noun when the noun is accom-
panied by an indefinite article:
O Joao e um amigo meu.
Joao is a friend of mine.
1 1.12.3
Demonstrative pronouns and nouns
Demonstrative pronouns are usually placed before the noun:
Este edificio tern vinte andares.
This building has twenty floors.
/ / . / 2.4 Adjectives and nouns
Adjectives are usually placed after the noun; however, when placed before
the noun they can lose their objective meaning:
uma mulher grande
uma grande mulher
a big woman
a great woman
1 1.12.5
Adverbs
(a) Adverbs are placed before adjectives and participles or may be combined
with another adverb (adverbs of intensity precede other adverbs):
uma mulher muito alta
Ele vinha muito apressado.
Ela sentiu-se muito mal.
a very tall woman
He was very rushed.
She felt very bad.
(b) Adverbs of manner are placed after verbs:
Ele partiu subitamente. He left suddenly.
(c) Adverbs of time or place are placed before or after verbs:
Ontem fui a um concerto.
Yesterday I went to a concert.
Fui a um concerto ontem.
I went to a concert yesterday.
A direita fica o castelo de S. Jorge.
On the right is St George's castle.
O castelo de S. Jorge fica a direita.
St George's castle is on the right.
Note: Some adverbs placed before the verb can add emphasis:
Muito se esforca ele para agradar a todos.
He tries very hard to please everybody.
Ela sempre inventa uma desculpa.
She always makes up an excuse.
But the adverb sempre can be a sentence adverb if placed before the verb,
thus modifying the whole sentence:
Eu viajo sempre de aviao. I always travel by plane.
Eu sempre vou a China. 8 I am finally going to China.
(d) Negative adverbs are placed before verbs:
Ele nunca foi ao teatro. He has never been to the theatre.
II. 12.6
Direct/indirect objects
Objects are usually placed in the following order:
Eu dei o livro ao Luis. verb + direct object + indirect object
I gave the book to Luis.
If the direct object is replaced by a pronoun, this order does not change:
Eu dei-o ao Luis. verb + direct object + indirect object
I gave it to Luis.
However, if the indirect object or the two objects are replaced by pronouns,
their order is altered. In a main clause or a question not introduced by an
interrogative, the pronoun is attracted to the verb and linked to it by a
hyphen:
Eu dei-/he o livro. verb + indirect object + direct object
I gave him the book.
Eu dei-/ho. (Ihe + o) verb + [indirect object + direct object]
I gave it to him.
In a subordinate or dependent clause, in a question introduced by an inter-
rogative, or in the presence of a negative, the pronoun is still attracted to
the verb, but precedes it:
Ele diz que eu Ihe dei o livro. subordinate clause + pronoun + verb
Quern Ihe deu o livro? interrogative + pronoun + verb
Eu nao Iho dei. negative + pronoun + verb
[j] Ser/estar
Both verbs are translated into English as 'to be', although they are not freely
interchangeable:
Ser indicates a state of permanence and inherent qualities or
conditions that are unlikely to change (location, nationality,
profession, features, demeanour, etc.).
Estar refers to a state or condition that is changeable or likely
to change (feelings, moods, change of location, weather
conditions, etc.).
O templo de Diana e em Evora.
The Temple of Diana is in Evora.
Nem todos os Ministerios estao no Terreiro do Pa$o.
Not all Ministries are in Terreiro do Pa$o.
A Paula Rego e uma pintora portuguesa que esta a viver
em Londres.
Paula Rego is a Portuguese painter who is living in London.
A Judite sempre foi muito bonita, mas nas fotografias de
casamento estd linda.
Judite was always very pretty, but she looks beautiful in her wedding
photos.
O Joao e uma pessoa naturalmente nervosa, ou estd
preocupado com os exames?
Is Joao a naturally nervous person or is he worried about his exams?
O Verao no Alentejo e geralmente quente, mas este ano
estd abrasador.
Summer in the Alentejo is usually hot but this year it is scorchingly
hot.
In an effort to make this section as clear and succinct as possible,
the basic expressions are given, followed by a brief explanation ;
examples often in the form of a short dialogue. As in the pre
section, a translation is provided for all examples.
Socializing
12.1
12.1. 1
General greetings
Informal
Ola B Hello!, Hi!
Frequently used for close family, friends and colleagues, ola can double up
as a sign of recognition, like 'Hi!' in English. The reply is also Ola!
Ola! Hi!
Ola, Joana! Hello, Joana!
Viva! Hi!
Used more seldom, Viva! B expresses delight on seeing someone:
Ola! Por aqui? Hello! Fancy meeting you here!
Viva! Ha quanto tempo! Hi! It's been a long time!
12.1.2 Formal welcome greeting
Bem-vindo/a/os/as. Welcome.
Used as a more formal welcome, Bem-vindo can be used for friends who
have come to stay:
- Bem-vindos a Viana do Castelo!
Welcome to Viana do Castelo!
- Ola, Joao! Bem-vindo a nossa casa.
Hello, Joao! Welcome to our house.
12
Socializing
Other variations:
dar as boas-vindas (a alguem)
apresentar as boas-vindas (a alguem)
apresentar votos de boas-vindas (a alguem)
to welcome
(someone)
A Comissao deseja apresentar as boas-vindas aos novos
membros.
The Committee wishes to welcome its new members.
Taking leave
12.2.1 Informal
Adeus B Goodbye
A general farewell formula, adeus can be used on its own or combined with
other farewell formulas. On its own, it implies a longer parting until
speakers meet again.
- Adeus, boa viagem!
Goodbye! Have a good trip!
- Obrigada. Adeus!
Thanks. Goodbye!
- Adeus, ate logo!
Bye-bye! See you later!
- Ate logo! B
Bye!
- Antes de partir, quero dizer adeus a todos os meus amigos.
Before leaving, I want to say goodbye to all my friends.
1 2.2. 1 . 1 There are other leave-taking formulas which can be used on their
own or combined with adeus. Most of these formulas make a statement
as to when speakers expect to meet again, and have as their key element
the word ate, 'until', which in this case has rather the meaning of 'see you
. . . (whenever)'.
Ate ja! See you anon, in a minute!
Ate logo! B See you later!
Ate amanha!
Ate depois de amanha!
Ate sabado! (or any day of
the week)
Ate para a semana! B
Ate para o mes que vem! B
Ate para o ano! B
Ate a proximal
Ate mais!
Ate sempre! B 1
1 Ate sempre is also used as a closing
See you tomorrow!
See you the day after tomorrow!
See you on Saturday!
See you next week!
See you next month!
See you next year!
Until next time!
See you!
Until we meet again!
la in letter writing.
/ 2.2.2 More formal farewells, figurative
despedir-se de B
apresentar despedidas
Quero-me despedir dos teus pais.
I want to say goodbye to your parents.
Desejamos apresentar as nossas despedidas a comissao
de recepcao e agradecer a agradavel estadia que nos
proporcionou.
We wish to bid farewell to the Reception Committee and thank
them for a wonderful stay.
Coimbra tern mais encanto na hora da despedida.
Coimbra is more charming when you are about to leave.
Greeting/taking leave according to time of day
Bom dia! Good morning!
Boa tarde! Good afternoon!
Boa noite! Good evening/night!
12
Socializing
These formulas can be used to greet someone, to open a conversation, to
attract someone's attention (mostly in shops), or to close a conversation,
as one is about to leave.
- Bom dia!
- Bom dia!
- Tern o Diario de Noticiasl
- Nao, so temos O Publico.
- Prefiro o outro. Bom dia!
Good morning!
Good morning!
Have you got the Diario de Noticias 7 .
No, we have only got 0 Publico.
I prefer the other paper. Goodbye!
- Boa noite! Que horas sao? Good evening. What time is it?
- Sao oito e meia.
It is 8.30.
[|2J Attracting attention
As indicated above, any of these greetings (bom dia, boa tarde and boa
noite) will do to initiate a conversation or attract attention in a cafe, a
shop, or even to attract the attention of someone in the street who could
help you with some information.
If you need to be more obvious, or you are in a crowd, for example in a
cafe, restaurant, market, street, etc., you can use the following formulas:
Faca favor! B Excuse me (meaning 'could you please give me/
tell me/etc.')
Desculpe Excuse me
Pst! BI
1 Can only be used to call a waiter in a cafe or restaurant. You must never say
'Waiter!' (empregado) in Portugal. Brazilians say Gargon!
Faca favor, tern gravatas de seda?
Excuse me, do you sell silk ties?
Desculpe, onde e o correio?
Excuse me, where is the post office?
Pst! Um cafe e um copo de agua.
Waiter! A cup of coffee and a glass of water.
1 12.4. 1 1 Asking people to pay attention
1 36 Any imperative forms of the verbs olhar, escutar, or of the idiom prestar
atengao (see 7.3.1 and 7.4):
Olha!, Olhe!, Olhem!
Look!
Attracting
Escuta!, Escute!, Escutem!
Listen!
attention
Presta/preste/prestem atencao!
Pay attention!
Olha! Estou aqui.
Look! 1 am here.
Olhe! Tanta gente!
Look! So many people!
Escute! Isto e importante.
Listen! This is important.
Escuta! O que e este barulho?
Listen! What is this noise?
Preste atencao! Ja temos pouco
Pay attention! We haven't
tempo.
much time.
All these can be emphasized and/or slightly modified by using them with
aqui or bem:
Olha/e aqui! Look here!
Escuta/e aqui! Listen carefully!
Escuta/e bem! Listen carefully!
Escuta/e bem aqui! Listen really well to what I have to say!
Olha/e bem aqui!
Pay very good attention (do not ignore me, this, etc.)!
Olha aqui! Que significa isto?
Look here! What does this mean?
Olha bem aqui! A final, que pretendes?
Look here! What do you really want?
12.4.2 Warning
The following warning words are often used as a sharp cry or shout to
warn people of danger. They can be followed by instructions, which are
given with a Subjunctive as they have the function of commands.
Atencao! Pay attention!
Cuidado! Watch out! Be careful!
Aviso. Warning.
Atencao aos comboios! Watch out for trains!
137
12
Socializing
Pare, escute e olhe!
Cuidado! Nao caias!
Cuidado com o cao.
Aviso
So se aceita pagamentos
em dinheiro.
12.4.3
Call for help
Stop, listen and look!
Watch out! Don't fall!
Beware of the dog.
Notice
Payment must be made
in cash.
Socorro!
Acudam!
Agarra que e ladrao! B
Help!
Help!
Stop thief!
Seasonal greetings
Merry Christmas!
Season's Greetings!
Happy Easter!
Feliz Natal!
Boas Festas!
Festas Felizes!
Feliz Pascoa!
Personal greetings
Parabens!
Feliz aniversario!
Happy birthday!
Happy birthday/anniversary!
Congratulations
Parabens!
Congratulations! Happy birthday!
dar os parabens a (alguem)
to congratulate (someone)
Este ano recebi dez cartdes de parabens.
This year I received ten birthday cards.
Parabens por teres passado no exame de conducao.
Congratulations on passing your driving test.
Dou-lhe os meus parabens por um excelente jantar.
I congratulate you on such a wonderful dinner.
Good wishes
Boas ferias!
Have a happy holiday!
Bom fii
im-de-semana!
Have a good weekend!
Boa viagem!
Have a good trip/journey!
Feliz regresso!
Have a safe journey home!
Boa sorte!
Good luck!
Introductions
apresentar-se
to introduce oneself
ser apresentado a (alguem)
to be introduced to (someone)
ter o prazer de apresentar (alguem)
to have the pleasure of introducing (someone)
On being introduced, you say muito prazer, state your name and shake
hands. Women may kiss each other instead of shaking hands.
- Podes apresentar-me aos teus amigos?
Will you introduce me to your friends?
- Tenho o prazer de apresentar um antigo colega de curso.
I have the pleasure of introducing an old college friend.
- Muito prazer, Antonio Lopes.
Antonio Lopes. Pleased to meet you.
- O prazer e todo meu, Manuela Sa.
Manuela Sa. Delighted. (The pleasure is all mine.)
- Ontem fui apresentada ao Director.
Yesterday I was introduced to the Director.
12
Socializing
12.10
1 2.10.1
Forms of address 6
Informal
tu/voce B you (sing.)
you (pi.)
Although meaning 'you', voce and voces are combined with pronouns and verbal
forms in the third person. As vos (2nd person pi.) has become obsolete in modern
Portuguese, voces works as the plural of tu.
- Onde e que voces vao hoje a noite?
Where are you going tonight?
- Vamos ao cinema. Tu tambem queres vir?
We are going to the cinema. Do you want to come as well?
12.10.2 Less informal
(verbal third person, subject unstated)^ you
voce you (sing.)
voces you (pi.)
o + name or surname you (male being spoken to)
a + name 2 you (female being spoken to)
1 Although gaining in popularity, in Portugal voce is still not widely accepted as a
polite form of address. Some people find it patronizing and others can even find
it offensive. To address people for whom tu is excessively informal, o senhor is
excessively formal and voce is unacceptable, it is common practice to use the third
person of the required verb, as if one were using voce but without actually saying
it. If the subject needs to be stated, then use the name of the person being spoken
to, as if it were a pronoun.
2 As a rule, women are never addressed by their surname.
- O Francisco e a Daniela, como estao de visita, nao
querem vir tambem?
As you are here on a visit, wouldn't you (Francisco and Daniela)
like to come too?
- N6s gostavamos imenso de ver um filme portugues.
O Silva e muito amavel em nos convidar. Pode dar-nos
boleia para o cinema? 8
We would love to see a Portuguese film. It is very kind of you
(Silva) to invite us. Can you give us a lift to the cinema?
12.10.3 Formal*
o(s) senhor(es) you (sir, ladies and gentlemen)
a(s) senhora(s) you (madam, ladies)
o(s) menino(s) you (boy, boys and girls), master
a(s) menina(s) you (girl, girls), miss B
Note: These forms can double up as subject pronouns.
- Os meninos sentem-se aqui enquanto a Menina
Fernanda vai comprar os bilhetes para o museu.
You (boys and girls) sit here whilst Miss Fernanda is buying the
museum tickets.
- As senhoras sabem a que horas termina a visita?
Do you (ladies) know at what time the visit ends?
Other ways of saying 'you':
V. Exa. (Vossa Excelencia) B you (in writing or very formal
occasions)
V. Rev. (Vossa Reverencia) you (member of the clergy)
- V. Exa. pode indicar a entrada para a sala de audiencias?
Can you (Sir/Madam) show me the way to the reception room?
- Eao fundo a direita. Na antecamara V. Rev. deve pedir
que o anunciem a Sua Eminencia.
It is at the end on your right. In the antechamber you (Reverend
father) must ask to be announced to His Eminence.
I2.I0.4\ Titles 8
Sr. + surname Mr . . .
Sra. D. + first name Mrs . . .
Sr(a). + profession, position or title
Dr./Sr. Dr. + surname Dr . . . (male)
Dra./Sra. Dra. + first name Dr . . . (female)
12
Socializing
Note: The full title is used in formal occasions and in writing. In everyday
communication the initial Sr. is dropped and only the professional title is
used. As a rule, women's titles are combined with first names whereas
men's titles are combined with surnames.
Other titles and formal forms of address:
Sr(a). Eng°( a ) . . .
Sr(a). Arq to ( ta > . . .
Sr(a). Professor(a) . . .
Sr(a). Professor(a)
Doutor(a) . . .
Sr(a). Ministro(a)
(do/da + portfolio)
for an engineer
for an architect
for a teacher
for a university teacher
or professor
for a minister
Sr(a). Conde/Condessa (de
Vossa Excelencia (V.Exa.)
Vossa Reverencia (V.Rev.)
Vossa Eminencia (V.Ema.)
Vossa Alteza (V.A.)
Vossa Majestade (V.M.)
Vossa Santidade (V.S.)
) for a count/countess
government and armed forces
officials
for members of clergy
for a cardinal
for princes, princesses, dukes
and duchesses
for kings, queens, emperors
and empresses
for popes
Note: Whenever these titles and forms of address need to be used as object
pronouns, they can assume the form of o senhor or Vossa Excelencia,
depending on the degree of formality of the occasion. Any titles and forms
of address with Vossa change into Sua when used as third person (see the
dialogue in 12.10.3).
- O Dr. Lemos ja chegou?
Has Dr Lemos already arrived?
- Ainda nao. O Sr. Eng°. deseja deixar recado?
Not yet. Would you like to leave a message?
- Nao. Prefiro falar com o Arq to . Sousa Leitao.
No. I prefer to speak to Mr Sousa Leitao.
12.10.5 Family 1
- Tambem nao esta. Foi chamado a uma reuniao com o
Sr. Ministro das Obras Publicas.
He is not in either. He was called to a meeting with the Minister
for Public Works.
o pai, o papa E
father, daddy
a mae, a mama 1
mother, mummy
o avo, o vovo 1
grandfather, grandad
a avo, a vovo 1
grandmother, grandma
o tio + (first name)
uncle . . .
a tia + (first name)
aunt . . .
Note: Members of the family belonging to the same generation as the
speaker, or younger, are addressed by their first name. In Portugal any
member of the family can be addressed informally by tu or less informally
by their degree of kinship, o avo, o pai, a mama, etc. depending on family
habits.
- A avo tern quern a leve a casa?
Have you got someone to take you home, grandma?
- Talvez possa ir com o teu tio Armando e tia Lita.
Perhaps I could go with your uncle Armando and aunt Lita.
- Os tios podem levar a avo a casa?
Can you (uncle and aunt) take grandma home?
- Podemos. Pergunta aos teus pais se depois querem vir
connosco ao cafe.
All right. Ask your parents if they would like to come to the cafe
with us later.
- O pai e a mae querem ir com os tios ao cafe, depois de
levarem a avo a casa?
Would you (mum and dad) like to go to the cafe with uncle
Armando and aunt Lita after they have taken grandma home?
Note the different forms of address and of saying 'y° u ' i n the above illus-
trative dialogue. 143
12
Socializing
12.11. 1
Talking about one's health
In small talk and greetings
Q: Como esta(s)?
A: Bern, obrigado/a.
Optimo/a!
Vamos indo.
Menos mal. B
How are you?
Well, thank you.
Very well.
Fairly well.
So-so.
The expressions suggested above are used after an initial exchange of greet-
ings. They can also serve as the opening of a detailed conversation about
one's health. This is a favourite topic for conversation in Portuguese.
12.1 1.2 At the surgery/hospital
12.1 1.2.1
Asking how/what you feel
Como se sente?
How do you feel?
O que sente?
What do you feel?
Tern . . . (dores, febre, nausea, etc.)?
Have you got . . . (pain, a temperature, nausea, etc.)?
Sente . . . ?
Do you feel . . . ?
12.1 1.2.2
Saying what you feel
Tenho . . . (dores, febre, etc.)
I have . . . (pain, a temperature etc.)
Sinto . . .
I feel . . .
Doi-me ... (a cabeca, um dente, etc.),
I have . . . (head-/tooth-ache, etc.)
1 2. 1 1 .2.3 Telling you what to do
Abra a boca.
Respire fundo.
Deite-se de costas.
Deite-se de barriga para baixo.
Tire o casaco.
Arregace a manga.
Tome . . . (name of medicine)
Deve tomar . . .
Tern que tomar . . .
Open your mouth.
Breathe deeply.
Lie on your back.
Lie on your tummy.
Take off your coat/jacket.
Roll up your sleeve.
Take . . .
You should take . . .
You must take . . .
. . dois comprimidos tres vezes ao dia.
. . two tablets three times daily.
. . uma capsula quatro vezes ao dia.
. . one capsule four times daily.
. . uma drageia de seis em seis horas.
. . one tablet every six hours.
Note: Doctors' instructions are given with the Present Subjunctive because
they are polite commands (see 7.3.1 and 7.4).
1 2. 1 1 .2.4 Asking what you can/should do
Posso . . . (fazer a minha vida normal B /levar uma vida normal/
continuar minha vida normalmente, beber, comer de tudo,
etc.)?
Can I . . . (carry on as normal, drink, eat anything, etc.)?
Devo . . . (fazer dieta, repousar, etc.)?
Should I . . . (diet, rest)?
Tenho que . . . (faltar ao trabalho, etc.)?
Do I have to . . . (miss work)?
Tenho que tomar . . . (name of medicine)?
Must I take . . . ?
Quantas vezes ao dia?
How many times a day?
12
Socializing
12.12
1 2. 1 2. 1
Places and locations
Identifying places
Isto e . . . (Lisboa, o Algarve, a Madeira)
This is . . . (Lisbon, the Algarve, Madeira)
. . . (place name) fica em . . . (place)
. . . (place name) . . . is in . . . (place)
12.12.2 Talking about places
Onde e . . . (place)?
Onde fica . . . (place, building, etc.)?
Como e . . . (o Minho, Guimaraes, etc.)?
Como sao . . . (os Acores, as praias, etc.)?
Where is ... ?
Where is ... ?
What is . . . like?
What are . . . like?
- Onde e Guimaraes?
Where is Guimaraes?
- E no Minho.
It is in Minho.
- Onde fica o Castelo?
Where is the castle situated?
- Fica no centro da cidade.
In the centre of town.
- Como e o castelo?
What is the castle like?
- E muito antigo, de muralhas grossas de pedra.
It is very old with thick stone walls.
- Como sao as ruas?
What are the streets like?
- Sao estreitas, fechadas ao transito.
They are narrow and closed to traffic.
12.12.3 Talking about place of origin, point of departure
De onde e? Where are you from?
De onde vem? Where do you come from?
De onde vem . . . (person, product)? Where does . . . come from?
E daf que vem . . . (person, product)? Does . . . come from there?
- De onde e?
Where are you from?
- Sou da Regua.
I am from Regua.
- E de onde e a sua colega?
And where is your colleague from?
- E da Alijo.
She is from Alijo.
- E de la que vem o vinho do Porto?
Is that where Port comes from?
- E.
Yes.
- E de onde vem o vinho do Dao?
And where does Dao wine come from?
- Vem da regiao de Viseu.
It comes from the region around Viseu.
Places and
locations
12.12.4 Place of residence and addresses
Onde mora? Where do you live?
Moro em . . . (place name or address) I live in . . .
Mora em . . . (place name, city area)? Do you live in ... ?
Mora na/o . . . (address)?
Qual e a sua morada B /endereso? What is your address?
147
12
Socializing
Qual e a morada do/a
(person, institution)?
E na/o . . . (address).
Onde vive?
Vivo em . .
Onde vive
Vive em . .
(country, region, town).
. (name of person)?
(country, region, town).
What is the address
of ... ?
It is in . . .
Where do you live?
I live in . . .
Where does . . . live?
He/she lives in . . .
Note: Viver is more general and can refer to the country, region, city or
address where one lives. Morar is more specific and refers only to the
address or town where one lives. If in doubt, use viver as you have a greater
chance of being correct. In Brazil, however, morar is more frequently used.
- Vive em Lisboa?
Do you live in Lisbon?
- Nao, vivo no Porto.
No, I live in Oporto.
- Qual e a sua morada?
What is your address?
- Rua dos Loios, 23-5° Esq.
23, Rua dos Loios, 5th floor, left.
- E os seus pais onde moram?
And where do your parents live?
- Moram em Marco de Canavezes.
They live in Marco de Canavezes.
- Qual e a morada deles?
What is their address?
- Largo do An jo, 350-r/c Dt°.
350, Largo do Anjo, ground floor, right.
|J^jy Talking about the weather
Most statements about the weather are made with the verb estar because
the weather is by its own nature changeable. Often the continuous form
estar a ... B is used, as one describes the present weather conditions (see
11.13).
Esta bom tempo.
The weather is good.
Talking about
Esta mau tempo.
The weather is bad.
the weather
Esta calor.
It is hot.
Esta frio.
It is cold.
Esta sol.
It is sunny.
Esta vento.
It is windy.
Esta uma aragem.
There is a light breeze.
Esta um vento fresco.
There is a cool wind.
Esta a chover. B
It is raining.
Esta a nevar. B
It is snowing.
Esta a trovejar. B
There is a thunderstorm.
Esta a relampejar. B
It is lightning.
With the idiom estar a fazer B it is possible to make a more dynamic descrip-
tion of the weather or even intensify the weather conditions:
Esta a fazer sol. B
Esta a fazer vento. B
Esta a fazer frio. B
The sun is shining.
The wind is blowing.
It is very cold.
The expressions ardente, de derreter, de rachar can further intensify the
description of the weather conditions. In the latter cases the preposition de
introduces a metaphor.
Esta um calor de derreter.
Esta um calor de morrer.
Esta um frio de rachar.
Esta um frio de morrer.
It is swelteringly hot.
It is stiflingly hot.
It is piercingly cold.
It is deadly cold.
Any changes in the weather are expressed by verbs which imply a change
in temperature:
aquecer 5
arrefecer
esfriar
refrescar
to warm up
to cool down
to cool down
to cool down
149
Ontem a noite fez muito frio.
It was very cold last night.
As noites ainda arrefecem muito.
It still gets very cold at night.
Sim, mas em Abril ja era para come^arem a aquecer.
Yes, but for April they should already be getting warmer.
Chapter 13
Exchanging factual
information
Q2] Identifying people
The most helpful structures in this case are those related to 'Interrogative
pronouns' (section 5.5, particularly 5.5.2 and 5.5.5).
The verb most used is ser ('to be') (see 11.13).
13.1.2 Identity
Quern e?
Quern e . . . (someone)?
Quern sao . . . ?
Qual e . . . (someone)?
Quais sao . . . ?
Como e . . . (someone)?
Who is it?
Who is ... ?
Who are ... ?
Which is ... ?
Which are ... ?
What is . . . like?
Quern e?
Who is it?
Sou eu, a Ana, podes abrir a porta?
It's me, Ana, can you open the door?
Quern sao as pessoas que acabam de sair?
Who are the people who have just left?
Sao os vizinhos do quarto andar.
They are my fourth-floor neighbours.
Qual e a filha mais nova?
Which is their youngest daughter?
151
13
Exchanging
factual
information
E a de casaco vermelho.
The one in the red jacket.
Quais sao os mais simpaticos?
Which are the nicest?
Sao os do quinto andar.
The ones on the fifth floor.
E como sao os vizinhos do lado?
And what are the next-door neighbours like?
Nao sei, estao sempre fora.
I don't know; they are always away.
13.1.3 Own ersh ip
De quern e . . . (something)? Whose ... is this/that?
Que . . . (something) e este/esta? Whose ... is this/that?
A quern pertence . . . (something)? Whom does . . . belong to?
E/sao . . . (possessive). It/they is/are . . .
E/sao de . . . (someone). It/they belong(s) to . . .
- De quern e esta pasta?
Whose briefcase is this?
- E da Ana Isabel.
It belongs to Ana Isabel.
- E que oculos sao estes?
And what about the glasses?
- Tambem sao dela.
They are also hers.
- E as luvas, a quern pertencem?
And the gloves, whose are they?
- Sao do Rui. Esqueceu-as aqui. Mas as luvas vermelhas
sao minhas.
They are Rui's. He left them behind. But the red ones are mine.
13.1.4 Profession, occupation
Que e . . . (someone)?
O que e . . . ?
Que faz . . . ?
O que faz . . . ?
Qual e a tua/sua profissao?
What does ... do?
What is your profession?
Qual e a profissao de . . . (someone)? What is . . . profession?
Qual e o posto de . . . (someone)? What is . . . rank/position
Onde trabalha/s?
Onde trabalha . . . (someone)?
Trabalho em . . . (somewhere).
Em que firma trabalha?
Trabalho na . . . (firm name).
Estou na . . . (firm name/service).
- O que faz o teu primo? B
What does your cousin do?
- E contabilista.
He is an accountant.
- E onde e que ele trabalha?
And where does he work?
- Trabalha num hotel. E o teu irmao?
He works in a hotel. And your brother?
- O meu irmao esta na Marinha.
My brother's in the Navy.
- Qual e o posto dele?
What is his rank?
- E primeiro tenente.
He is a lieutenant.
Where do you work?
Who do you work for?
Where does . . . work?
Who does . . . work for?
I work in . . .
Who do you work for?
I work for . . .
I work for . . .
13
Exchanging
factual
information
O teu pai tambem e da Marinha?
Is your father also in the Navy?
Nao, ja esta reformado.
No, he is already retired.
Identifying things
O que e isto/aquilo?
Que . . . (something) e este/a?
Que tipo/especie de . . .
(something) e/sao?
Como e . . . (something)?
De que e?
De que e feito?
Como e feito?
Como se faz?
What is this/that?
What ... is this?
What kind of . . . is/are .
What is . . . like?
What is it made of?
What is it made out of?
How is it made?
How does one make it?
- O que e isto?
What is this?
- E uma torta.
It is a tart.
- De que e?
What is it made of?
- E de amendoa.
It is an almond tart.
- Como e feita?
How does one make it?
- No forno, com um recheio de ovos e amendoa.
In the oven with an egg and almond filling.
- E que doce e este?
And what dessert is this?
- Sao farofias.
They are 'farofias'.
- Como sao as farofias?
What are 'farofias' like?
- Sao claras batidas cozidas em leite e com molho de ovos.
They are beaten egg whites boiled in milk, with an egg sauce.
Asking for information 6
Pode-me dizer B . . . (sentence with interrogative)?
Could you tell me ... ?
Importa-se de me dizer . . . ?
Would you mind telling me ... ?
Diga-me B . . . (sentence with interrogative), por favor.
Can you please tell me ... ?
Sabe dizer-me B . . . (sentence with interrogative)?
Could you tell me ... ?
Note: These phrases usually introduce a question with an interrogative
pronoun (see section 5.5), an adverb (see 8.1 (i)) or a conjunction (see
section 9.2.8).
- Pode-me dizer qual e a estrada para Espinho?
Could you tell me which is the road to Espinho?
- E a primeira a direita.
It is the first on the right.
- Diga-me se ha proximo um posto de gasolina, por favor.
Can you please tell me whether there is a petrol station nearby?
- Ha um a safda da cidade.
There is one as you leave town.
- E sabe dizer-me se esta aberto a esta hora?
And could you tell me if it is still open?
- Esta aberto ate as dez da noite.
It is open until 10 p.m.
- Importa-se de me dizer as horas?
Would you mind telling me the time?
- Sao dez para as dez.
It is 9.50.
13
Exchanging
factual
information
13.3.1 Asking the time
Que horas sao?
Tern horas?
Sabe-me dizer as horas?
A que horas . . . ?
What time is it?
Have you got the time?
Can you tell me the time?
At what time . . . ?
13.3.2
Telling the time
E/sao . . .
Meio-dia
Meia-noite
. . . (hour) e um quarto
. . . (hour) menos um quarto
um quarto para a(s) . . .
. . . (hour) e meia
. . . (hour) e . . . (minutes)
as . . .
das . . . as . . .
da man ha/da tarde
- Tens horas?
Have you got the time?
- Sao onze e um quarto.
It is a quarter past eleven.
- A que horas chega o comboio da Ana?
At what time does Ana's train arrive?
- Chega as duas e vinte.
It arrives at twenty past two.
- Podes ir busca-la a estacao? Tenho uma aula as duas da tarde.
Can you meet her at the station? I have a class at 2 p.m.
It is . . .
noon, midday
midnight
a quarter past . . .
a quarter to . . .
a quarter to . . .
half past . . .
indicating hours and minutes
at . . .
from . . . to . . .
a.m./p.m.
- Esta bem. Sendo assim, podemos sair de casa por volta
do meio-dia e meia, deixo-te na faculdade a uma e sigo
depois para a esta^ao.
All right. In that case, we can leave the house at about half past
twelve, I can leave you at the university at one and then I'll make
my way to the station.
Reporting, describing and narrating
(a) These are all interrelated language functions. The main requirement to
perform these functions correctly is to have a good knowledge of
verbs, their tenses and the meaning of each tense (see Chapter 7).
The Present (7.2.1), Imperfect (7.2.3) and Preterite (7.2.4) tenses are
particularly important.
(b) Do not forget that when narrating an event which took place in the
past, the Imperfect refers to the background state or action whereas
the Preterite refers to the incident which occurs once at a given
moment, frequently against the background described by the Imperfect
(see 7.2.3 .Id and 7.2.4.1b).
(c) The Imperfect can also imply the idea of habit or repetition (7.2.3.1b).
(d) The Present Perfect in Portuguese, contrary to most other languages, is
a continuous tense. It describes an action that began in the past, has
been developing until now and may even continue into the future
(7.2.2.1a). It is a very fluid tense - no set start to the action and no set
end.
(e) A good knowledge of nouns, adjectives, pronouns, their inflections,
prepositions, conjunctions, etc. is also required.
(f) There are no set formulas for these functions, as each sentence will
depend on what you have to say.
The best advice is always to try and think in Portuguese, using as many
set phrases, formulas and structures as you have learnt so far, and adapting
them to the message you have to communicate. This is particularly import-
ant if you are a beginner. Avoid at all costs thinking in your mother tongue
and then translating into Portuguese.
If you compare the examples we give you in each section and the respect-
ive translation, you will notice that you are seldom presented with literal
translations. That is because literal translations seldom work.
13
Exchanging
factual
information
Quando eu era pequena
lamos sempre passar o
Verao a Mira. Tmhamos la
uma casa junto a praia onde
havia uma lagoa enorme e as
criancas podiam brincar e
nadar em seguranca.
Um dia, de repente,
levantou-se um grande
temporal. Uma onda
gigantesca varreu a praia e
chegou a fazer transbordar a
lagoa. O meu irmao mais
novo quase morreu afogado.
Os meus pais, preocupados,
nunca mais nos deram a
mesma liberdade ao brincar
na praia e passamos a fazer
ferias no campo.
Ultimamente, esses tempos
da minha infancia tem-me
vindo a memoria e espero,
em breve, voltar a Mira . . .
com os meus filhos.
When I was young we always
used to spend the Summer in
Mira. We had a house there,
near the beach, where there was
a huge lagoon and the children
could swim and play in safety.
One day, suddenly, there was a
big storm. A huge wave swept
over the beach and made the
lagoon overflow. My younger
brother nearly drowned. My
parents, who were worried,
never gave us the same freedom
when playing on the beach and
we began spending our holidays
in the countryside.
Lately, those days of my youth
have been coming back to me
and I hope, soon, to return to
Mira . . . with my children.
13.4.1 Reporting
The advice given above applies equally to reporting in general, but a few
guidelines are useful when reproducing and reporting speech.
Avoid repeating the same verb to introduce consecutive items of speech.
Use different verbs, but make sure that they reflect the nature of the speech
they refer to. Here is a useful list:
acrescentar
afirmar
assegurar
comentar
to add
to state
to assure
to comment
garantir
indagar
informar
inquirir
to guarantee
to sound out
to inform
to inquire
criticar to criticize insistir to insist
declarar to state, to declare interrogar to query
dizer to say perguntar to ask
- Eu nao roubei o carro!, declarou o ladrao. Mas o agente
da pohcia comentou duvidoso:
'I didn't steal the car!' declared the thief. But the police officer
commented doubtfully:
- Isso e o que se vai ver!, e acrescentou a queima-roupa: -
E por isso que as chaves estavam no bolso do teu casaco.
That remains to be seen!' and he added as an aside: That's why
the keys were in your jacket pocket.'
- Mas esse casaco nao e o meu!, assegurou o ladrao. -
E tudo uma tramoia para me incriminar - afirmou.
'But that jacket is not mine!' assured the thief. This is all a plot
to frame me,' he stated.
- Ontem estive todo o dia no trabalho - insistiu ele.
'Yesterday I was at work all day,' he insisted.
Note: There is inversion of subject and verb when the direct speech is
presented first and the reference to the speaker comes after, as above: '. . .
- insistiu ele.'
Reporting,
describing
and narrating
1 3.4. 1 . 1 Direct speech/reported speech
In reported speech the same range of introductory verbs is used as in direct
speech, but the sequence of verbal tenses is different. A different sequence
of adverbs of place and time, possessives and demonstratives is also
required:
Direct speech Reported speech
verbs Present Imperfect
Present Perfect, Preterite Past Perfect
Present and Future Subjunctive Past Subjunctive
Present Perfect Subjunctive Past Perfect Subjunctive 159
13
Exchanging
factual
information
adverbs of place aqui
ca
adverbs of time
possessives
demonstratives
ontem
hoje
amanha
ali
la
no dia anterior
nesse/naquele dia
no dia seguinte
first and second person third person
isto isso, aquilo
este/esse aquele
estes/esses aqueles
Now look at the new version of the previous dialogue in reported speech:
O ladrao declarou que nao
tinha roubado o carro.
Mas o agente da pohcia
comentou duvidoso que
isso era o que se ia ver, e
acrescentou, a queima-
roupa, que era por isso
que as c haves estavam no
bolso do casaco dele. O
ladrao, no entanto,
assegurou que aquele nao
era o seu casaco, afirmou
que era tudo uma tramoia
para o incriminar e insistiu
que no dia anterior tinha
estado todo o tempo no
trabalho.
The thief declared that he had
not stolen the car. But the
police officer commented
doubtfully that that remained
to be seen and he added, as
an aside, that that was the
reason why the keys were in
the pocket of the thief's
jacket. The thief, however,
assured him that the jacket in
question was not his, stated
that it was all a plot to frame
him and insisted that the day
before he had been at work
all the time.
Letter writing
Letter writing is also related to reporting, narrating and describing,
but letters contain specific elements such as a record of the date, typical
opening and closing formulas, and the text itself often makes ample use
of the Subjunctive, as letters often contain good wishes, requests or even
commands.
13.5.1 Dates 8
Always on the top right-hand side of the page.
Write the place, the day in cardinal numbers, the month and the year.
Porto, 30 de Novembro B de 1998 Oporto, 30 November 1998
13.5.2 Opening formulas
13.5.2.1 Formal
Exmo(a). Senhor(a) B
Exmo(a). Sr. + (profession
position, title + surname)
Dear Sir/Madam
Dear Mr/Dr/Captain/etc.
1 3.5.2.2 Less formal
(Meu/Minha) caro(a) + (name) Dear . . .
(Meu/Minha) caro(a) amigo(a) Dear friend
(Meu/Minha) caro(a) colega Dear colleague
I3.5.2.3| Informal
Ola + name Hi . . .
1 3.5.2.4 Intimate
(Meu/Minha) querido(a) + (name, pai, mae, tio, irmao . . . )
Dear . . . father/mother/uncle/brother/etc.
Meu amor
Dearest
13.5.3 Closing form ulas
13.5.3.1 Formal
De V.Exa. Yours sincerely
muito atentamente
Melhores cumprimentos 1 Yours faithfully
1 Nowadays, the formula Melhores cumprimentos is more widely used.
13
Exchanging
factual
information
Santarem, I de Marco de 1 998
Exmo. Senhor,
Agradecemos a V. carta de
25.2.98 e informamos que
o pagamento ja foi feito no
dia 23 do corrente.
Agradeciamos que nos
enviassem o respectivo
recibo.
De V. Exa.
muito atentamente,
(assinatura)
Santarem, I March 1998
Dear Sir,
Thank you for your letter of
25.2.98. We can inform you
that payment has been made on
23rd of this month. We would
be grateful if you could send us
the respective receipt.
Yours sincerely,
(signature)
1 3.5.3.2 Less formal
Cumprimentos Regards
Um abraco Best wishes
13.5.3.3 Informal
Um beijo 1 Kisses Um abraco Hugs
1 Um beijo is used between women, from women to men and vice versa, but never
between men.
13.5.3.4
Intimate
Um beijo Love
Um abraco Love
Muitas saudades Lots of love
Recife, 3.4.99
Cara Guida,
Adoro o Recife. O tempo
esta maravilhoso e as
pessoas sao fantasticas.
Ate breve.
Recife, 3.4.99
Dear Guida,
I love Recife. The weather is
fantastic and the people are
wonderful. See you soon.
Saudades,
(nome)
Love,
(name)
Correcting assumptions
The easiest and most straightforward way of correcting assumptions made
by someone addressing the speaker is to say Nao and then confirm the
negative with a short negative sentence. A simple 'nao' for an answer is
judged somewhat curt and impolite.
Nao, nao + verb No, I don't/haven't.
- Tern troco de € 1 00?
Have you got change for €100?
- Nao, nao tenho.
No, I haven't.
Alternatively, one can say nao and then follow it with a correcting state-
ment. This can be introduced by mas, 'but', include the expression e que,
a confirmation with the verb ser or even use a prepositional pronoun to
emphasize the correction.
- O senhor tern troco de €200?
Have you got change for €200?
- Nao, so tenho de € 1 00.
No, only for €100.
- Mas nos avisamos que os pagamentos deviam ser feitos
no montante exacto.
But we made it clear that all payments had to be made in the
correct amount.
- Nao, a mim ninguem disse nada. O senhor falou foi com
esta senhora ao lado.
No, I was not told anything of the sort. The person you spoke
to was this lady next to me.
Correcting
assumptions
13.6.1 Polite formulas to introduce corrections
Excuse me, but . . .
Desculpe, mas . . .
Lamento, mas . . .
Esta enganado/a, . . .
Esta errado/a . . .
Isso nao e assim.
Isso nao e bem assim.
I am sorry, but . . .
You are mistaken, . .
You are wrong . . .
That is not so.
That is not quite so.
163
13
Exchanging
factual
information
- Lamento, mas essa promocao ja terminou.
I am sorry, but that special offer has already ended.
- Desculpe, mas o vale ainda esta dentro do prazo.
Excuse me, but the voucher is still within the expiry date.
- Esta enganado, essa oferta ja expirou.
You are mistaken, that offer has ended.
- Como pode ser, se as instrucoes dizem o contrario?
How is that possible, if the instructions say the opposite?
- Isso nao e bem assim, a oferta so dura enquanto houver
stock 1 .
That is not quite so. The offer is only valid as long as stocks last.
1 Estoque in Brazilian Portuguese.
Chapter 14
Getting things done
[SI Suggesting a course of action
Vamos!
Vamos + (Infinitive phrase)
E se + (phrase with Past Subjunctive)
Porque nao + (phrase with Present tense)
Podfamos + (Infinitive phrase)
Devfamos + (Infinitive phrase)
- E se fossemos fazer um piquenique?
What if we had a picnic?
- Optima ideia! Vamos!
Great idea! Let's!
- Podfamos convidar os nossos colegas ingleses.
We could invite the English students.
- Claro, mas devfamos tambem convidar os outros
colegas estrangeiros, porque e uma excelente
oportunidade de confraternizar com todos.
Of course, but we should also invite the other foreign students,
as it is an excellent opportunity to socialize with everybody.
- Porque nao aproveitamos ja o proximo fim-de-semana?
Why don't we take advantage of next weekend?
Let's go!
Let us . . .
What if we . . .
Why don't we
We could . . .
We should . . .
14 Offering to do something
Getting things
done Quer/queres/querem que 1 + (phrase with Present Subjunctive)?
Do you want me to ... ?
Deseja que 1 + (phrase with Present Subjunctive)?
Would you like me to ... ?
Posso + (verb in Infinitive)?
Can I/May I . . . ?
Podemos + (verb in Infinitive)?
Can we/May we ... ?
1 The Subjunctive must be used with these phrases because they imply an indirect
command or wish.
- Posso ajudar? Querem que traga uns pasteis de bacalhau?
Can I help? Do you want me to bring some fish cakes?
- N6s tambem podemos dar uma ajuda e trazer uma
sobremesa.
We can also give you a hand and bring a dessert.
Requesting others to do something
Most requests are made with the verb either in the Imperative or in the
Present Subjunctive (see sections 7.3 and 7.4), but they can also be intro-
duced by some set formulas followed by phrases with the verb in the
Present Subjunctive:
Desejo/desejamos que . . . I/we wish you to . . .
Pe^o/pedimos que . . . I/we ask you to . . .
Quero/queremos que . . . I/we want you to . . .
Ordeno/ordenamos que . . . I/we order you to . . .
Importa-se de + (phrase with Infinitive)? Would you mind . . . ?
Note: All these requests can be either preceded or followed by por favor,
se faz favor, etc.
- 6 Ana, faz uma torta de amendoa e traz guardanapos
de papel, se fazes favor.
Ana, please bake an almond tart and bring paper napkins.
- Esta bem, mas quero que me digas quantas pessoas vais
convidar para o piquenique.
All right, but I want you to tell me how many people you are
inviting to the picnic.
- Importas-te de me telefonar amanha a noite? Nessa
altura ja te posso dizer.
Do you mind phoning me tomorrow evening? I can tell you then.
Inviting others to do something
Gostava/s de + (phrase with Infinitive)? Would you like to . . .
Quer/es + (phrase with Infinitive)? Do you want to ... ?
convidar to invite
Esta/s convidado/a. You are invited.
Esta/s convidado/a para . . . You are invited to . . .
- O David tambem quer vir connosco? B
David, do you want to come too?
- Claro que quero.
Of course I do.
- Entao esta convidado.
Then you are invited.
- Tambem posso convidar a minha irma?
Can I also invite my sister?
- Com todo o gosto.
With pleasure.
- Entao aceito ja em nome dela.
Then I accept on her behalf.
Asking for and giving advice
Que aconselha?
Qual e o teu/seu conselho?
Que acha(s) que devo fazer?
What do you advise?
What is your advice?
What do you think I should do?
Aconselho-o/a a + (phrase with Infinitive)
I advise you to . . .
0 meu conselho e que + (phrase with Subjunctive)
My advice is that you . . .
Nao o/a aconselho a + (phrase with Infinitive)
1 advise you not to . . .
Aconselho-o/a a nao + (phrase with Infinitive)
I advise you not to . . .
O meu conselho e que nao + (phrase with Subjunctive)
My advice is that you should not . . .
No teu/seu lugar + (phrase with Conditional or Imperfect)
If I were you . . .
Note: Some of the expressions above require a Subjunctive because they
are equivalent to indirect commands or wishes (see section 7.3).
- Eu adorava ir ao piquenique, David, mas tenho tanto
trabalho para acabar. Que achas que devo fazer?
I would love to go to the picnic, David, but I have so much work
to finish. What do you think I should do?
- O meu conselho e que te divirtas primeiro e depois te
lances ao trabalho.
My advice is that you have some fun first and then you throw
yourself into your work.
- Mas como vou conseguir terminar tudo?
But how am I going to finish everything?
- Primeiro aconselho-te a nao ficar excessivamente
preocupada, e depois e de facto melhor descansar um
pouco. No teu lugar, eu nao perdia o piquenique.
First, I advise you not to get too worried and then it is in fact
better for you to have a bit of a break. If I were you, I would
not miss the picnic.
Warning others
(See also 12.4.2.)
Atencao!
Watch out!
Preste atencao!
Watch out!
Cuidado! Take care! Watch out!
Perigo! Danger!
Olha/olhe que . . . Beware/Be careful . . .
Tem/tenha cuidado com/porque ... Be careful because . . .
Toma/tome cautela com/porque . . . Beware/Be careful because . . .
Toma/tome cuidado com/porque . . . Beware/Be careful because ...
Esta avisado/a. You have been warned/told.
Quiet words of warning can also be expressed by means of sentences with
the verb in the Subjunctive. Such sentences are equivalent to indirect or
polite commands or wishes (see 7.3).
- Olhe que e muito perigoso ir nadar com a bandeira
vermelha.
Be careful, because it is dangerous to swim when the red flag
is up.
- Acha que sim? Pensei que aqui nao havia perigo.
Do you think so? I thought there was no danger here.
- Tome cautela, porque o mar aqui e muito forte e a
corrente puxa para longe.
Be careful, because the sea here is very strong and the current
drags you away.
- Mas eu gosto tanto de nadar.
But I enjoy swimming so much.
- Esta avisado. Depois nao se queixe.
You have been told. Do not complain later.
Instructing others to do/not to do something
These instructions are given using sentences with the verb in the Present
Subjunctive because these are, in effect, commands. This type of sentence
is used in instructions on how to operate equipment, in cooking recipes,
advertising, propaganda, etc. (See 12.11.2.3; doctors' instructions are also
given in the Subjunctive.)
Arroz doce
Rice pudding
Ponha uma chavena 1 de
arroz numa panela e cubra-o
de agua. Nao deixe ferver
mais de 10 minutos.
Adicione casca de limao, e
sal e, agora, deixe aferventar
mais 5 a 10 minutos
adicionando leite quente.
Quando o arroz estiver
cozido, adicione um pouco
mais de acucar do que a
quantidade de arroz e deixe
ferver um pouco mais.
Finalmente, junte duas
colheres de sopa de
manteiga, mexa ate
derreter, retire do lume, 2 e
sirva numa travessa ou numa
taca. Polvilhe com canela.
1 Xfcara in Brazilian Portuguese.
2 Fogo in Brazilian Portuguese.
Put a cupful of rice in a pan and
cover it with water. Do not
allow it to boil for more than ten
minutes. Add lemon rind and salt
and now allow to simmer for
another 5 to 10 minutes, adding
hot milk. When the rice is soft,
add a little more sugar than the
amount of rice used and allow to
simmer a little longer. Finally, add
two dessertspoons of butter, stir
until the butter melts, remove
from the heat, and pour into a
server or a bowl. Sprinkle with
cinnamon.
^ Requesting assistance
Once again, as most of these sentences are equivalent to commands or
polite requests, they require the use of the Subjunctive:
Ajuda/e-me B a + (phrase with Infinitive)
Help me to . . .
Pode(s) ajudar-me B a + (phrase with Infinitive)
Can you help me to ... ?
Pode(s) dar uma ajuda?
Can you help?
Da/de-me B uma ajuda.
Give me a hand.
- Ajuda-me a lavar o carro, por favor.
Help me wash the car, please.
Stating and
finding out
whether
t
- Esta bem, mas depois tambem me das uma ajuda com o
Q Stating and finding out whether something is
compulsory
E obrigatorio + (phrase with Infinitive)
It is compulsory to . . .
Tern que se + (phrase with Infinitive)
One has to . . .
Nao e obrigatorio + (phrase with Infinitive)
It is not compulsory to . . .
Nao e necessario + (phrase with Infinitive)
It is not necessary to . . .
E obrigatorio?
Is it compulsory?
Tern que se + (phrase with Infinitive)?
Does one have to ... ?
Tenho/temos que + (phrase with Infinitive)?
Do l/we have to ... ?
- E necessario responder ao convite?
Do we have to reply to the invitation?
- Sim, ate ao dia 1 5 deste mes.
Yes, up until the 1 5th of the month.
- Temos que ir de gravata?
Do we have to wear a tie?
jardim.
All right, but afterwards you give me a hand in the garden too.
something is
compulsory
- Nao e obrigatorio, mas era melhor.
It is not compulsory, but it would be advisable.
171
14 Seeking, giving, refusing permission
Getting things
done Pode-se + (phrase with Infinitive)?
Can one . . . ?
Posso/podemos + (phrase with Infinitive)?
May l/we . . . ?
E permitido + (phrase with Infinitive)
Is one allowed to ... ?
Temos autorizacao de/para + (phrase with Infinitive)?
Have we permission to ... ?
E possivel + (phrase with Infinitive)?
Is it possible/Is one allowed to ... ?
E proibido + (phrase with Infinitive)
It is forbidden to . . .
Nao e permitido + (phrase with Infinitive)
One is not allowed to . . .
Dar autorizacao de/para + (phrase with Infinitive)
To give permission to . . .
- Pode-se fumar?
Is smoking allowed?
- Nao. Aqui no refeitorio e proibido, mas na sala de
convfvio ja e permitido.
No, here in the refectory, it is forbidden, but it is allowed in the
Common Room.
- E possivel convidar uma colega inglesa para vir almocar aqui?
Is it possible for me to invite an English colleague for lunch here?
- Tern que pedir ao director se da autorizacao.
You must ask the director for permission.
Expressing and finding out about need
Preciso de + (phrase with Infinitive)
Preciso que + (phrase with Subjunctive)
I need to
I need to
Tenho necessidade de + (phrase with Infinitive)
I need . . .
Precisa(s) de + (phrase with Infinitive)?
Do you need to ... ?
Precisa(s) que + (phrase with Subjunctive)?
Do you need to ... ?
Tens/Tern necessidade de + (phrase with Infinitive)?
Do you need . . . ?
- Precisas de dinheiro?
Do you need any money?
- Neste momento nao, mas amanha tenho necessidade de
ir ao banco porque preciso de pagar a renda da casa.
Not at the moment, but tomorrow I have to go to the bank
because I need to pay my rent.
Enquiring and
expressing
intention,
want or
desire
mj Enquiring and expressing intention, want or desire
Tenciona(s) + (phrase with Infinitive)?
Do you intend to ... ?
Que tenciona(s) + (Infinitive)?
What do you intend to ... ?
Tens/Tern a intencao de + (phrase with Infinitive)?
Do you intend to ... ?
Esta(s) decidido/a a + (phrase with Infinitive)?
Are you determined to ... ?
Deseja(s) + (phrase with Infinitive)?
Do you wish to ... ?
Quer(es) + (phrase with Infinitive)?
Do you want to ... ?
Quero + (phrase with Infinitive)
I want to . . .
Tenho a intencao de + (phrase with Infinitive)
I intend to . . .
Faco tencao/tencoes de + (phrase with Infinitive)
I intend to . . .
Que tencionas fazer quando terminares o curso? B
What do you intend to do when you finish your degree?
Quero ir trabalhar em Angola.
I want to work in Angola.
Estas mesmo decidido a sair de Portugal?
Are you quite determined to leave Portugal?
Estou. So tenho inten^ao de regressar ao fim de dois anos.
Yes, I am. I only intend to return at the end of two years.
Chapter 15
Finding out and expressing
intellectual attitudes
Agreement and disagreement
vvnat uo you tniriKi
Mcna^sj que sim:
Do you accept/approve? Do you
think so?
Acha(s) bem?
Do you think it is all right?
Concorda(s)?
Do you agree?
Esta(s) de acordo?
Do you agree?
Nao acha(s) bem?
Don't you agree/approve?
Nao concorda(s)?
Don't you agree? You do not agree?
/ o ©
Nao esta(s) de acordo?
Don't you agree? You do not agree?
Acha(s) que nao? 1
You do not approve?
Tem/tens objeccoes? 1
Do you object?
Nao tem/tens objeccoes? 1
Don't you object?
Quais sao as objeccoes?
What have you got against it?
Esta bem.
All right.
Acho bem.
1 agree.
Muito bem.
Very well. Very good.
Boa ideia!
Good idea!
Concordo.
1 agree.
Concordo plenamente!
1 completely agree.
Penso/acho que sim.
1 think so.
15
Finding
out and
expressing
intellectual
attitudes
Nao senhor!
Nao concordo.
Discordo.
Discordo plenamente!
Penso/acho que nao.
Nao pode ser!
Nem pensar!
Redondamente nao!
De jeito nenhum!
Absolutely not!
I do not agree.
I disagree.
I thoroughly disagree!
I don't think so.
That is not possible.
Heaven forbid!
Absolutely not!
No way!
It cannot be tolerated that . . .
Nao se pode tolerar que +
(phrase with Subjunctive)
1 These questions are half-expecting an expression of disagreement.
- No Verao podiamos ir numa excursao ao Amazonas.
Que achas?
In the Summer we could go on a trip to the Amazon. What do
you think?
- Eu acho bem. E uma optima ideia.
I agree. It is a fantastic idea.
- Pois eu acho que nao.
Well, I disagree.
- Nao achas bem ir visitar uma das regioes mais fasci-
nantes do mundo, e que esta em risco de extincao?
Don't you approve of visiting one of the most fascinating regions
in the world, which is in danger of extinction?
- Eu, nao. Discordo plenamente.
No, I don't! I thoroughly disagree.
- Quais sao as objeccoes?
What have you got against it?
- Nao se pode tolerar que turistas como nos contribuam
para danificar ainda mais o ambiente. Alem disso, lamos
estragar as ferias a palmilhar a selva por um calor
insuportavel. Nem pensar!
It is intolerable that tourists like us contribute towards further
damaging the environment. Besides, our holidays would be spoilt,
trotting about the jungle in unbearable heat. Heaven forbid!
Knowing something or someone
O que e isto?
Sabe(s) o que e isto?
Conhece(s) este produto?
Sabe(s) se . . . ?
Sabe(s) dizer-me se . . . ?
Conhece(s) . . . (someone)?
Conhece(s) bem . . . ?
Sei, sim. [
Conheco, sim. J
Conheco bem . . .
Conheco mal . . .
Nao sei . . .
Nao conheco . . .
Desconheco . . .
Desconheco por completo.
Nao sei de todo.
What is this?
Do you know what this is?
Do you know this product?
Do you know if . . . ?
Can you tell me if ... ?
Do you know/Are you acquainted
with . . . ?
Are you well acquainted with . . . ?
Yes, I do (know something).
I am well acquainted with . . .
I do not know (someone/something)
very well./l am not well acquainted
with . . .
I do not know (something).
I do not know (someone).
I do not know (something/someone).
I really do not know.
I do not know at all.
- Sabe quern e o Dr. Sampaio?
Do you know who Dr Sampaio is?
- Sei, sim. E medico de chnica geral neste centro clmico.
Yes, I do. He is a GP in this surgery.
- Sabe dizer-me se ja chegou?
Can you tell me whether he has already arrived?
- O Dr. Sampaio ja veio e ja saiu. As tercas-feiras so da
consulta de manna.
Dr Sampaio has been and has already left. He only sees patients
in the morning on Tuesdays.
15
Finding
out and
expressing
intellectual
attitudes
- Sabe se deixou recado para mim? Tinha-me dito que
viesse falar sobre os resultados das analises.
Do you know whether he left a message for me? He told me to
come and discuss the result of my tests.
- Desconheco completamente. O Dr. Sampaio nao esta e
nao deixou qualquer recado.
I really do not know. Dr Sampaio is not in and he has left no
message.
Remembering something or someone
r I
r Do you remember . . . ?
Lembras-te de
Lembra-se de .
Nao te lem bras/record as
de . . . ?
Nao se lem bra/record a
de . . . ?
Esqueceste-te de . . . ?
Esqueceu-se de . . . ? J
Sim, lembro.
Lembro-me bem de . . .
Nao me lembro.
Nao me lembro nada.
Nao me lembro de nada.
Tenho uma ideia.
Tenho uma vaga ideia.
Nao tenho ideia nenhuma. 1
Nao faco a minima ideia.
Don't you remember . . . ?
Have you forgotten . . . ?
Yes, I remember,
remember . . . well,
do not remember,
do not remember at all.
do not/cannot remember a thing,
have an idea,
have a vague idea,
have no idea.
haven't got the faintest idea.
1 If you change the word order into Nao tenho nenhuma ideia, it means 'I do not
have any ideas'.
- Recorda-se de eu ter vindo aqui ontem fazer compras?
Do you remember me coming here yesterday to do some shopping?
- Sim, recordo bem.
Yes, I remember it well.
- E que paguei €35 na caixa por dois CDs, mas esqueci-me
de os levar. Lembra-se?
I paid €35 at the till for a couple of CDs, but I forgot to take
them with me. Do you remember?
- Nao. Nao faco a minima ideia.
No. I haven't the faintest idea.
- Tente recordar-se. Eu vim com uma amiga directamente
do trabalho. Estavamos as duas com o uniforme da polfcia.
Try to remember. I came directly from work with a friend.
We were both wearing our police uniform.
- Ah! Sim, pareco recordar-me agora.
Oh! Yes, I seem to remember now.
Possibility and impossibility
This type of sentence requires two basic phrase structures with the main
verb in either the Infinitive or the Subjunctive:
Infinitive: when you want to ask or to state whether it is
possible or impossible to do something,
e.g. E impossfvel eles chegarem a tempo.
Subjunctive: when you want to judge whether something is
possible or impossible. As this is the same as putting
forward a hypothesis, a Subjunctive is required
(see 7.3e): e.g. E impossfvel que eles cheguem
a tempo.
E possfvel?
E possfvel + (phrase with Infinitive)?
E possfvel que 1 + (phrase with
Subjunctive)?
Sera possfvel + (phrase with Infinitive)?
Sera possfvel que 1 + (phrase with
Subjunctive)?
Is it possible?
Is it possible to ... ?
Is it possible to/that . . . ?
Will it be possible?
Can it be possible . . . ?
15
Finding
out and
expressing
intellectual
attitudes
80
Nao e possfvel?
E impossfvel?
E impossfvel + (phrase with Infinitive)?
E impossfvel que 1 + (phrase with
Subjunctive)?
Talvez.
Talvez + (phrase with Subjunctive)
Talvez sim/nao.
Provavelmente.
Provavelmente + (phrase with Indicative)
E provavel que + (phrase with Subjunctive)
E muito provavel que + (phrase with
Subjunctive)
E pouco provavel que + (phrase with
Subjunctive)
E muito pouco provavel que + (phrase
with Subjunctive)
E possfvel.
E possfvel + (phrase with Infinitive)
E possfvel que + (phrase with Subjunctive)
E impossfvel.
E impossfvel + (phrase with Infinitive)
E impossfvel que + (phrase with
Subjunctive)
Nao pode ser!
Nao e possfvel que + (phrase with
Subjunctive)
These phrases can imply disbelief.
Is it not possible?
Is it impossible?
Is it impossible to ... ?
Is it impossible to/that
. . . ?
Perhaps/Maybe.
Perhaps/Maybe . . .
Perhaps it is/isn't.
Probably.
Probably . . .
It is likely that . . .
It is very likely that . . .
It is unlikely that . . .
It is highly unlikely
that . . .
It is possible.
It is possible to . . .
It is possible that . . .
It is impossible.
It is impossible to . . .
It is impossible to/
that . . .
It can't be (possible)!
It can't be possible
to/that . . .
- E possfvel marcar uma passagem para Londres no voo
de amanha de manna?
Is it possible to make a booking for tomorrow morning's flight
to London?
- No voo da manna e impossfvel, esta esgotado, mas no
da tarde talvez, embora seja pouco provavel nesta epoca
do ano.
On the morning flight it's not possible; it is fully booked. Perhaps
on the afternoon flight, although it is unlikely at this time of the
year.
- Veja la. Tenho que estar em Londres na quinta-feira.
See what you can do. I have to be in London by Thursday.
- Lamento, mas, afinal, tambem nao e possfvel. So quinta-
feira de manna.
I am sorry but it is not possible either. Only Thursday morning.
- Nao pode ser! Sera possfvel que com tantos voos diarios,
nao me consegue arranjar nada antes de quinta-feira?
It can't be! How can it be possible that with so many daily
flights, you cannot find me anything before Thursday?
- Lamento muito, mas e de todo impossfvel arranjar um
voo mais cedo.
I am very sorry, but it is absolutely impossible to find an earlier
flight.
Logical conclusions
E logico que + (phrase with Subjunctive)? Is it logical that . . . ?
Acha logico que + (phrase with
Subjunctive)?
Portanto . . .
Por conseguinte . . .
Por consequencia . . .
E logico que + (phrase with Subjunctive)
E de esperar que + (phrase with Present
Subjunctive)
Do you think/find it
logical that . . . ?
Therefore . . .
Therefore . . .
As a consequence . .
It is logical that . . .
It is to be expected
that . . .
15
Finding
out and
expressing
intellectual
attitudes
Era de esperar que + (phrase with Past
Subjunctive)
Nao e logico que + (phrase with
Subjunctive)
Nao e de esperar que + (phrase with
Present Subjunctive)
Nao era de esperar que + (phrase with
Past Subjunctive)
Nao tern logica nenhuma que + (phrase
with Subjunctive)
It would be expected
that . . .
It is not logical that . .
It is not be expected
that . . .
It wouldn't be expected
that . . .
There is no logic at all
in that . . .
Nao e logico que depois de tantas negociacoes se faca
este investimento?
Isn't it logical that at the end of so much negotiating we embark
on this investment?
Nao, nao acho nada logico, porque nao temos garantias
e ainda podemos perder muito dinheiro.
I do not find it logical at all, because we have no guarantees and
we can still lose a lot of money.
Mas as companhias com quern lidamos sao de renome, por
conseguinte, e de esperar que o investimento seja seguro.
But we are dealing with companies with good reputations and,
therefore, it is to be expected that the investment is safe.
Incomprehension and clarification
Nao percebo.
Nao compreendo.
Nao entendo.
Nao estou a compreender. B
Nao percebo/compreendo nada.
Nao percebo/entendo porque . . .
Pode(s) repetir?
Pode(s) repetir mais devagar?
I do not understand.
I do not understand at all.
I do not understand why . . .
Can you repeat it?
Can you repeat more slowly?
Pode(s) explicar melhor? Can you explain better?
Pode(s) esclarecer melhor? Can you be clearer?
- Desculpe, mas nao compreendo o que me esta a dizer.
Pode repetir, por favor?
I am sorry but I do not understand what you are telling me. Can
you repeat it, please?
- Continuo a nao perceber porque e que a encomenda
nao pode ser entregue hoje. Pode explicar melhor?
I still do not understand why the order cannot be delivered
today. Can you explain it better?
Certainty and uncertainty
Tenho a certeza.
Tenho a certeza de que . . .
Estou certo/a de que . . .
Estou seguro/a de que . . .
Nao tenho a B certeza.
Nao tenho a B certeza de que +
(phrase with Subjunctive)
Nao estou certo de que +
(phrase with Subjunctive)
Duvido que + (phrase with
Subjunctive)
I am sure.
I am sure that . . .
I am certain that . . .
I am not sure.
I am not sure that . . .
I am not sure that . . .
I doubt that . . .
- A Joana ja tera enviado a encomenda?
I wonder whether Joana has already sent the parcel?
- Duvido. Ela disse que nao estava certa se a poderia
mandar anteontem ou na proxima semana.
I doubt it. She said she was not sure whether she would be able
to send it the day before yesterday or next week.
Estou certa de que nao vai esperar pela proxima
semana. Ela sabe como e urgente.
I am sure she is not going to wait until next week. She knows
how urgent it is.
Disso eu ja nao estou tao segura. Sabes como ela e
esquecida.
Of that I am not so sure. You know how forgetful she is.
Tens a certeza? Ela sempre me pareceu uma pessoa
muito organizada.
Are you sure? She has always struck me as a very organized
person.
Judgement and evaluation
Expressing pleasure or liking
Prefiro . . .
Gosto de . . .
Adoro . . .
Que bom!
Que bom que + (phrase with
Subjunctive)
Ainda bem que . . .
Estou satisfeito/a por + (phrase
with Infinitive)
Estou satisfeito/a que + (phrase
with Subjunctive)
Estou encantado/a por + (phrase
with Infinitive)
Estou encantado/a que + (phrase
with Subjunctive)
Tenho prazer em + (phrase with
Infinitive)
Tenho o prazer de 1 + (phrase with
Infinitive)
Muito prazer. 1
Encantado/a. 1
I prefer . . .
I like . . .
I love . . .
How nice!
How nice that . . .
It is good that . . .
I am glad that . . .
I am glad that . . .
I am delighted that . . .
I am delighted that . . .
I am pleased to . . .
I am pleased to . . .
Pleased to meet you.
Delighted to meet you.
1 Formulas used in introductions and presentations (see 12.9).
16
Judgement
and
evaluation
Estou encantada por terem vindo. Tenho tanto prazer em
os conhecer.
I am delighted you came. I am so pleased to meet you.
N6s tambem estamos muito satisfeitos por nos
encontrarmos finalmente. Adoramos conhecer outros
ramos da familia.
We are also very pleased to finally meet you. We love to meet
other branches of the family.
Ainda bem que vieram hoje, porque assim tambem podem
ter o prazer de conhecer a minha sogra, que esta ca de
visita.
It is good that you could come today because you can also have the
pleasure of meeting my mother-in-law, who is spending some time
with us.
Expressing displeasure or dislike
Nao gosto.
Nao gosto muito de . . .
Nao gosto nada.
Nao gosto nada que + (phrase with
Subjunctive)
I do not like it.
I am not very fond of . .
I do not like it at all.
I hate that . . .
I hate it!
What horrid taste!
How dreadful!
It is horrid/dreadful!
It is dreadful/horrible.
Detesto!
Que mau gosto!
Que horror!
E horroroso!
E hornvel.
E hornvel que + (phrase with Subjunctive) It is dreadful that . . .
Aborrece-me que + (phrase with It upsets me that . . .
Subjunctive)
Estou aborrecido/a por + (phrase with I am upset because . . .
Infinitive)
Irrita-me que + (phrase with Subjunctive) It irritates me that . . .
Embirro B que + (phrase with Subjunctive) It annoys me that . . .
Detesto que + (phrase with Subjunctive) |
r I hate that . . .
Odeio que + (phrase with Subjunctive) J
- Que coisa horrorosa!
What a horrid thing!
- O que e?
What is it?
- E a prenda de Natal que a tia Aldegundes me mandou.
E um pavor de mau gosto!
It's the Christmas present aunt Aldegundes sent me. It is the
height of bad taste.
- Realmente e um chapeu hornvel. Onde e que se pode usar
uma coisa dessas?
It really is a dreadful hat. Where can one wear anything like that?
- Embirro que me mandem prendas estupidas e inuteis.
Detesto aquela tia.
I hate to be sent stupid and useless presents. I hate that aunt.
- Eu tambem nao gosto muito dela. Que prenda tera para
mim?
I am not very fond of her either. What present will she have for
me?
Enquiring
about
pleasure/
displeasure,
liking/dislike
Enquiring about pleasure/displeasure, liking/dislike
Gosta(s)?
Gosta(s) de . . . ?
Esta(s) satisfeito?
Esta(s) satisfeito com . . . ?
Nao gosta(s)?
Nao gosta(s) de . . . ?
Nao esta(s) satisfeito?
Nao esta(s) satisfeito com
Do you like it?
Do you like . . . ?
Are you pleased?
Are you pleased with . . . ?
Don't you like it?
Don't you like . . . ?
Aren't you pleased?
Aren't you pleased with . . . ?
187
16
Judgement
and
evaluation
- Gostava de umas sandalias de Verao.
I would like a pair of summer sandals.
- Prefere com ou sem salto?
Do you prefer them with or without a heel?
- Prefiro com um pouco de salto, mas nao quero demasiado
alto.
I prefer them with a bit of a heel, but not too high.
- Esta satisfeita com estas?
Are you happy with these?
- Sim, gosto bastante destas, mas estao um pouco apertadas.
Yes, I quite like these, but they are a little tight.
- E com estas nao esta satisfeita? Sao de pele muito macia.
And what about these, aren't you happy with them? They are in
very soft leather.
- Sim, estas sao confortaveis. E gosto deste estilo. Pode
mandar embrulhar.
Yes, these are comfortable. And I also like this style. You can have
them wrapped for me.
Enquiring about and expressing interest/lack of
interest
Gosta(s) de . . . ?
Nao gosta(s) de . . . ?
Interessa-se/lnteressas-te por . . ,
Nao se interessa por . . . ?/Nao
te interessas por . . . ?
Deseja(s) . . . ?
Nao deseja(s) . . . ?
Interessa-te/lhe + (phrase with
Infinitive)?
Nao te/lhe interessa + (phrase
with Infinitive)?
E interessante.
Interesso-me por . . .
Do you like . . . ?
Don't you like . . . ?
? Are you interested in ... ?
Aren't you interested in ... ?
Would you like . . . ?
Wouldn't you like . . . ?
Would you be interested
in ... ?
Wouldn't you be interested
in ... ?
It is interesting.
I am interested in . . .
Tenho interesse por . . .
Tenho curiosidade por . . .
Nao e de interesse.
Estou interessado/a em . . .
Nao me interessa.
Nao me interessa nada.
Nao tenho qualquer interesse.
- Bom dia. Estou interessado num livro sobre o Brasil.
Good morning. I am interested in a book on Brazil.
- Deseja este aqui? E muito interessante. Tern muitas
informacoes sobre os melhores hoteis e restaurantes.
Would you like this one? It is very interesting. It has a lot of
information on the best hotels and restaurants.
- Esse tipo de livro nao tern interesse para mim. Tenho
muita curiosidade pela antropologia do Brasil.
I am not interested in that type of book. I am very keen on
Brazilian anthropology.
- E esse af, nao Ihe interessa? E uma publicacao da
Universidade do Rio de Janeiro.
What about that one, wouldn't you be interested? It is a
University of Rio publication.
- Nao, esse nao me interessa nada. E uma edicao muito antiga.
No, that one is of no interest at all. It's a very old edition.
Expressing surprise
Que surpresa!
Quern diria?!
Nao era de esperar!
Nao era de esperar que +
(phrase with Subjunctive)
Meus Deus!
Minha Nossa Senhora! B
1 am keen on . . .
Expressing
1 am keen on/I am curious
surprise
about . . .
It is of no interest.
1 am interested in . . .
1 am not interested.
■
1 am not interested at all.
1 am not interested in the least.
What a surprise!
Who would believe it?!
It was not (to be) expected!
It was not (to be) expected
that . . .
Good Lord!
189
- Professor Lacerda, que surpresa! Nao esperava nada ve-lo
aqui.
Professor Lacerda, what a surprise! I didn't expect to see you here.
- E a Margarida Canavarro, nao e? Do curso de '95?
You are Margarida Canavarro, aren't you? Class of '95?
- Pois sou. Quern diria que o havia de encontrar aqui em
Manchester.
Yes, I am. Who could tell that I would meet you here in Manchester.
- Na realidade eu nao era para estar aqui, mas resolvi vir a
este congresso de Fonetica.
In fact, I hadn't planned to come but I decided to attend this
conference on Phonetics.
Expressing hope
Oxala!
Oxala + (phrase with Subjunctive)
Quern dera! B
Se Deus quiser.
Deus permita que + (phrase with
Subjunctive)
Era bom que + (phrase with
Subjunctive)
Deus nos livre!
Deus nos livre que + (phrase with
Subjunctive)
I hope so!
I hope . . .
I do hope so!
God willing. All being well.
I hope to God that . . .
It would be nice if . . .
Heaven forbid!
Heaven forbid that . . .
Note: Sentences expressing hope are equivalent to a wish and require a
Subjunctive (see 7.3).
- Oxala facam boa viagem.
I hope you have a good journey.
- Se Deus quiser nao vai haver novidade.
All being well, there will be no problems.
- Tenho tanto medo das viagens longas de noite. Deus
permita que nao haja um acidente.
I am so scared of long journeys at night. I hope to God there
won't be any accidents.
- Deus nos livre, mae. Vai ver que vai tudo correr bem.
Heaven forbid, mother. Everything will be all right, you will see.
- Quern dera! B
I do hope so!
Enquiring about and expressing satisfaction/
dissatisfaction
Esta(s) satisfeito?
Ficaste/ficou satisfeito?
Agrada-te/lhe + (phrase with Infinitive)
Estou satisfeito/a.
Estou satisfeito/a com . . .
Fiquei satisfeito/a.
Fiquei satisfeito/a com . . .
Estou contente.
Estou contente com . . .
Fiquei contente.
Fiquei contente com . . .
Nao estou satsifeito/a.
Nao estou satsifeito/a com . . .
Nao estou nada satisfeito/a com . . .
Are you satisfied/pleased?
Were you satisfied/pleased?
Would you like to ... ?
I am satisfied/pleased.
I am satisfied/pleased with . .
I was satisfied/pleased.
I was satisfied/pleased by . .
I am happy/contented.
I am happy/contented with .
I was happy.
I was happy with . . .
I am not satisfied/pleased.
I am not happy with . . .
I am not happy at all with . .
- O Sr. Dr. 1 ficou satisfeito com o hotel que Ihe
reservamos?
Were you pleased with the hotel we booked for you, Sir?
16
Judgement
and
evaluation
- Sim, fiquei relativamente satisfeito. O quarto era
confortavel, com todas as comodidades, agradou-me a
localizacao, proximo do metropolitano, mas nao fiquei
nada contente com a conta.
Yes, I was reasonably pleased - the room was comfortable, with all
the facilities, I appreciated its nearness to the underground, but I
was not at all happy with the bill.
1 Note the use of the title both as form of address and subject. The title indicates
that the person has an academic degree. This information is not reflected in the
English equivalent, 'Sir'.
Expressing disappointment
Estou desiludido/a com . . .
Estou desapontado/a com . .
Estou decepcionado/a com .
Fiquei desiludido/a com . . .
Fiquei desapontado/a com .
Fiquei decepcionado/a com
I am disappointed with . . .
I was disappointed with . . .
- Estou muito desiludido com o hotel Ratz. Tern muita fama,
mas a qualidade do servico e fraca e as diarias sao caras.
I am very disappointed with the Ratz Hotel. It has a good
reputation, but the service is poor and the daily rates are high.
- Da ultima vez que la fiquei tambem fiquei desapontado com
o restaurante. O servico foi demorado e a comida veio fria.
The last time I stayed there I was also disappointed with the
restaurant. The service was slow and the food was cold.
Enquiring about and expressing worry or fear
Esta(s) preocupado/a? Are you worried?
Esta(s) nervoso/a? Are you nervous?
Tens/Tem medo?
Esta(s) com medo?
Are you afraid?
Estou preocupado/a.
Estou nervoso/a.
Estou uma pilha de nervos.
Fico uma pilha de nervos
Tenho medo.
Tenho medo de + (phrase with
Infinitive)
Tenho um terror medonho de +
(phrase with Infinitive)
Ai, que medo!
Que medo!
Que susto!
Estou a tremer de medo.
Estou gelado/a de medo.
Estou aterrorizado/a.
I am worried.
I am nervous/anxious.
I am a bag of nerves.
I become a bag of nerves.
I am afraid.
I am afraid to . . .
I am dreadfully scared
of...
Gosh! I'm scared!
How frightening!
What a fright!
I am shaking with fear.
I am frozen with fear.
I am terrified.
Estou a tremer de medo!
I am shaking with fear!
Que aconteceu?
What happened?
Fui la fora passear o cao e ouvi passos atras de mim.
I went out to walk the dog and I heard footsteps behind me.
Ai, que medo! Eu tenho um terror medonho de andar
na rua sozinha a noite.
Gosh, how frightening! I am dreadfully scared of going out at
night all by myself.
Eu nao costumo ter medo quando vou com o cao, mas
desta vez fiquei gelada porque os passos vinham para aqu
Usually I am not afraid when I go out with the dog, but this time
I was frozen with fear because the footsteps were coming in this
direction.
- Nao me digas isso, que fico uma pilha de nervos.
Don't say that or I'll become a bag of nerves.
16
Judgement
and
evaluation
16.10
Enquiring about and expressing preference
Prefere(s) . . . ?
Qual prefere(s)?
Por qual tens/tem preferencia?
De qual gosta(s) mais?
Nao prefere(s) . . . ?
Nao gosta(s) mais de . . . ?
Prefiro . . .
Tenho preferencia por . . .
Gosto mais de . . .
Do you prefer . . . ?
Which do you prefer?
Which would you prefer?
Which do you like best?
Wouldn't you prefer . . . ?
Wouldn't you like . . . more?
I prefer . . .
I would prefer . . .
I like . . . best.
Boa tarde. Tern blusas de malha?
Good afternoon. Have you got any knitted tops?
Prefere de la ou de algodao?
Do you prefer wool or cotton?
Gosto mais de algodao.
I like cotton best.
Tern preferencia por manga curta ou comprida?
Would you prefer short or long sleeves?
Prefiro de manga comprida.
I prefer long sleeves.
94
Expressing gratitude
Obrigado/a.
Muito obrigado/a.
Agradeco muito.
Estou muito grato/a.
Bern haja(s). 1
Deus te/o/a ajude.
Deus te/lhe pague.
Que Deus te/o/a abencoe.
Used only in European Portuguese.
Thank you.
Thank you very much.
I am very grateful.
I am very grateful.
God bless.
God bless you.
God bless you.
May God bless you.
- Muito obrigado por me trazer a estacao.
Thanks a lot for driving me to the station.
- Nao tern de que, eu e que agradeco a companhia.
It was nothing. I am the one who is grateful for the company.
- Nao calcula o jeito que me deu, senao tinha perdido o
comboio. Bern haja.
You can't imagine how convenient it was, otherwise I would
have missed the train. God bless you.
- Igualmente.
And you.
^ Expressing sympathy
Tenho pena. I am sorry.
Tenho muita pena.
r I am very sorry.
Lamento muito. J
Os meus pesames. 1 My sympathy.
Sinceros pesames. 1 In deepest sympathy.
Formulae used in messages of sympathy.
- Lamento muito que o teu marido nao esteja ca por
ocasiao da morte da tua sogra. Conta comigo no que for
necessario.
I am very sorry your husband is not here on the passing away of
your mother-in-law. You can count on me for any help.
- Muito obrigada. Agradecia que me ajudasses a tratar da
correspondencia.
Thank you very much. I would be grateful if you could help me
with the correspondence.
- Esta aqui um cartao de pesames que veio da Madeira:
'Sentimos muito a morte da D. Jacinta. Sinceros
pesames. Abel e Carolina Silva.'
Here is a sympathy card from Madeira: 'Our deepest sympathy
on the passing away of Mrs (Correia). 1 Abel and Carolina Silva.'
1 We are assuming that the deceased lady was called Mrs Jacinta Correia (see
12.10.4).
Expressing happiness and unhappiness
Estou feliz por + (phrase with Infinitive) I am happy to . . .
Estou contente por + (phrase with Infinitive) I am happy to . . .
Estou radiante. I am overjoyed.
Estou louco/a de alegria. I am over the moon.
- Estou louca de alegria - conseguimos comprar o
apartamento que quenamos no Algarve.
I am over the moon - we managed to buy the apartment we
wanted in the Algarve.
- Parabens! Eu tambem fico muito contente por voces.
Congratulations! I am also very happy for you.
- Mas ainda estou mais radiante por termos conseguido
vender a nossa casa em Inglaterra.
But I am even more overjoyed because we managed to sell our
house in England.
Judgement
and
evaluation
Apologizing
Desculpe. I am sorry. I beg your pardon.
Perdao. I beg your pardon.
Com licenca. Excuse me. With your permission.
- Com licenca. Deixem passar, por favor.
Excuse me. Please let me through.
- Desculpe, mas eu estava a frente.
I am sorry, but I was ahead of you.
- Perdao, a senhora nao estava na bicha. B
I beg your pardon, but you were not in the queue.
- Claro que estava! Estava ao lado deste cavalheiro.
Of course I was. I was standing next to this gentleman.
Enquiring about and expressing approval/
disapproval
Acha(s) bem?
Do you approve?
Acha(s) mal?
Do you disapprove?
Concorda(s)?
Do you agree?
Nao acha(s) bem?
Don't you approve?
Nao acha(s) mal?
You do not disapprove;
Nao concorda(s)?
Don't you agree?
Sim.
Yes.
Pois!
Quite!
Pois claro.
Of course.
Sim senhor!
Well done!
Muito bem.
Very well. Well done.
Parabens!
Congratulations!
Bravo!
Bravo!
Nao.
No.
Nao senhor!
Absolutely not!
Claro que nao.
Of course not.
Nao pode ser.
It can't be.
Nunca!
Never!
Jamais!
Never ever!
Discordo.
1 disagree.
Discordo plenamente.
1 absolutely disagree.
- Entao fica acordado um investimento na ETC da ordem
dos €2.500.000. Acha bem?
We then agree upon an investment of €2.5 million in ETC.
Do you approve?
Claro que nao. Eu discordo plenamente.
Of course not. I absolutely disagree.
Mas, na ultima reuniao, o Sr. Director sugeriu que se
fizesse um investimento na ETC . . .
But at our last meeting you advised that we should make an
investment in ETC . . .
Pois fir, mas nao de €2.500.000.
Quite! But not of €2.5 million.
- Entao o Sr. Director acha mal?
Do you disapprove, then?
- Pois claro que acho! Eu aconselhei um pequeno
investimento inicial, atendendo a insistencia dos outros
membros do conselho directivo.
Of course I do! I advised a small initial investment, owing to the
insistence of the other members of the Board.
- Nao senhor! O Sr. Director falou num investimento
consideravel.
No, you didn't! You spoke of a considerable investment.
- Eu? Naquela firma? Nunca!
Me? In that firm? Never!
Judgement
and
evaluation
Expressing appreciation
Muito bem.
Very well.
Muito bom.
Very good.
Excelente.
Excellent.
Muito bonito.
Very pretty.
Que bonito!
How beautiful!
Maravilhoso.
Marvellous.
Extraordinario.
Outstanding.
- Ja esteve em Sintra?
Have you already been to Sintra?
- Ainda nao. E bonito?
Not yet. Is it nice?
- E lindo. O Palacio da Vila e o Palacio da Pena sao
extraordinariamente interessantes, e a paisagem da
serra e maravilhosa.
It is beautiful. The Palacio da Vila and the Pena Palace are
extremely interesting and the mountain landscape is wonderful.
- Muito bem, entao vou ja marcar lugar numa excursao.
Great! Then I am going to book a seat on a tour straight away.
Expressing regret
Lamento, mas ... I am sorry but . . .
Lamento muito. I am very sorry.
Estou arrependido/a de + (phrase I regret . . .
with Infinitive)
Se eu soubesse + (phrase with If I had known . . .
Imperfect or Conditional)
Se pudesse voltar atras + (phrase If I could turn back time . .
with Imperfect or Conditional)
- Estou tao arrependido de ter ido a Sintra.
I regret so much having gone to Sintra.
- A B serio? Porque?
Really? Why?
- Porque caf duma muralha no Castelo dos Mouros e torci
um pe.
Because I fell from a wall in the Moors' Castle and twisted my
ankle.
- Nao diga. Se eu soubesse nao o tinha encorajado a la ir.
You don't say. If I had known, I wouldn't have encouraged you
to go.
- Pois e. Se pudesse voltar atras tinha antes ido a praia.
Quite. If I could turn back time, I would have gone to the beach
instead.
16
Judgement
and
evaluation
16.18
Expressing indifference
Nao tern importancia.
It doesn't matter. Never mind.
Nao tern importancia nenhuma. It doesn't matter at all.
It makes no difference.
It's all the same to me.
I don't mind.
I don't mind at all.
I do not care a bit.
Tanto faz.
E-me indiferente.
Nao me im porta.
Nao me importa nada.
Nao me rala nada. 1
1 Not used in Brazilian Portuguese.
- Prefere carne ou peixe?
Do you prefer meat or fish?
- Tanto faz.
It makes no difference.
- E para beber? Prefere vinho branco ou tinto?
And to drink? Do you prefer white or red wine?
- E-me indiferente.
It's all the same to me.
- Nesse caso, importa-se que eu escolha?
In that case, do you mind if I choose?
- Nao me importa nada. Recebi a conta do hospital e perdi
0 apetite.
1 don't mind at all. I received the hospital bill and lost my appetite.
- Isso nao tern importancia. Vai ver que amanha ja esta
melhor.
Never mind. You will see that tomorrow you will feel better.
16.19
Accusing
Foste tu que ... It was you who . . .
Foi voce/o senhor/a senhora que ... J It was you who . . .
A culpa e tua/sua. It is your fault.
A culpa e toda tua/sua. It is all your fault.
Tu es o/a culpado/a de . . . (
I You are to blame for . . .
Voce/o senhor e o culpado de . . . J
- O senhor nao ve por onde vai?
Can't you see where you are going?
- Eu? O senhor e que bateu no meu carro.
Me? It was you who hit my car.
- Nao senhor. O senhor e que e o culpado deste acidente.
Not at all. You are to blame for this accident.
- Perdao, mas a culpa e toda sua. Devia ter parado.
I beg your pardon, but it is all your fault. You should have stopped.
- Desculpe, mas foi o senhor que entrou no cruzamento
sem olhar.
Excuse me, but it was you who entered the junction without
looking.
Enquiring about and expressing capability/
incapability
Sabe(s) + (phrase with Infinitive)?
Can you/Do you know how to ... ?
Pode(s) + (phrase with Infinitive)?
Can you . . . ?
E(s) capaz de + (phrase with Infinitive)?
Can you/Are you capable of . . . ?
Tens/Tern coragem de + (phrase with Infinitive)?
Have you got the courage to ... ?
Sei + (phrase with Infinitive)
I can/know how to . . .
Posso + (phrase with Infinitive)
I can . . .
Sou capaz de + (phrase with Infinitive)
I am capable of . . .
16
Judgement
and
evaluation
Tenho coragem de + (phrase with Infinitive)
I have the courage to . . .
Nao sei + (phrase with Infinitive)
I cannot/don't know how to . . .
Nao sou capaz de + (phrase with Infinitive)
I cannot . . .
Sou incapaz de + (phrase with Infinitive)
I am incapable of . . .
Nao tenho coragem de + (phrase with Infinitive)
I do not have the courage to . . .
Nao posso + (phrase with Infinitive)
I can't . . .
- Posso entrar?
Can I come in?
- Podes. Entra!
Yes, please do.
- Podes dar-me uma ajuda?
Can you give me a hand?
- Claro, se puder.
Of course, if I can.
- Como sabes falar alemao, es capaz de me traduzir esta
carta?
As you know how to speak German, can you translate this letter?
- Agora nao posso. Tenho muito que fazer. Talvez a hora do
almoco. Pode ser?
At the moment I can't. I am too busy. Perhaps at lunchtime. Is that
all right?
PART III
Brazilian variants
Brazilian essential grammar
and language functions
The numbering in this section corresponds to those points marked with B
in Parts I and II. Entries in this section are thus preceded by the prefix 'B'.
Brazilian essential grammar
Entries refer only to variants found in Brazilian Portuguese.
Language functions
As second person pronouns are seldom used in Brazilian Portuguese,
remember to transform the examples in Part II into sentences with the verb
in the third person, usually preceded by voce, voces or o senhor, a senhora,
os senhores, as senhoras or any other third person subject. Many exam-
ples already illustrate the use of third person, but, obviously, not all of
them, as second person pronouns and verbal forms can be useful in other
parts of the Portuguese-speaking world, even in some areas of Brazil.
Also, do not forget that Brazilian Portuguese Imperative forms are usually
borrowed from the Present Subjunctive (see B7.4.1); therefore, examples
with 'true' Imperatives using a second person must be transformed into
sentences with the polite Imperative deriving from the Present Subjunctive.
Chapter Bl
Pronunciation and spelling
Portuguese variants and spelling
There are some pronunciation and spelling variations among European
Portuguese, Brazilian and even African Portuguese. These, however, are not
wide enough to prevent communication. Another important factor, which
contributes towards variations within Portuguese, is the inevitable lexical
preference displayed by speakers of each region or country.
It is interesting to note that African Portuguese, especially the Portuguese
spoken in Angola and Mozambique, seems to sit roughly in the middle
of the variation spectrum between European and Brazilian Portuguese.
There are historical factors which explain this, but they do not fall within
the scope of an 'essential grammar' such as the present work. African
Portuguese is understood to be the Portuguese spoken in the PALOP
countries (Paises Africanos de Lingua Oficial Portuguesa) - Angola, Cape
Verde, Guinea-Bissau, Mozambique and S. Tome e Principe - all former
Portuguese colonies which became independent after 1974 and which
adopted Portuguese as their official language.
The term 'African Portuguese' is by definition a wide generalization, as
wide as Brazilian Portuguese. When considering such vast countries and
continents, there is bound to be a reasonable degree of variation from
area to area. Variation is also evident in the various regions of a country
as small as Portugal, although, as stated above, that should not hinder
communication.
Spelling also reflects this variation. A number of orthographic agreements
have been signed, the latest in 1992, trying, with varying degrees of success,
to bring together the spelling adopted by the different Portuguese-speaking
countries. This, however, will only come into force after having been
approved in the respective parliaments of all signatories, which may only
'06 happen some years hence. In any case, most printed material in Portuguese,
presently in circulation, follows the guidelines established by the 1973
agreement and considerable time will elapse before these are out-numbered
by new publications adopting the 1992 orthographic agreement. For that
reason, it was decided that the present work should follow the 1973 guide-
lines. Indeed, many Portuguese and Brazilian native speakers vow to
maintain the present orthography, as that is the one they are used to. In
all likelihood, the 1992 agreement will only be fully implemented and used
with the new generation, which is now entering primary school.
In general terms, the main concern of the 1992 agreement was to simplify
and bring closer together the spelling adopted in all Portuguese-speaking
countries but, at the same time, enabling it to reflect more closely the actual
pronunciation used in each. For example, at the moment, the word jacto
'jet' is spelt with a c in European Portuguese but simply jato in the Brazilian
variant, although the pronunciation is the same in both cases. When the
1992 agreement comes into force, the c will also disappear from European
Portuguese spelling.
The case of words like recepgao 'reception' is different. At present, the same
spelling is adopted in all Portuguese-speaking countries; however, after the
1992 orthographic agreement comes into force, the p will be maintained
in Brazilian Portuguese, because it is clearly pronounced there, but it will
disappear from European Portuguese, because it is not pronounced in
Portugal. The same will happen to the word excepcional 'exceptional' and
a few others. Curiously, the word excepgao 'exception' has a slightly
different story. Whereas in European Portuguese it will also lose the p,
in Brazilian Portuguese it has already been dropped because it is not
pronounced.
Words such as facto 'fact' will maintain the c in European Portuguese,
whereas in Brazil it has already been removed, hence fato, as the c is not
pronounced there.
None of this should worry the learner unduly, because it is not of crucial
importance at this stage, and orthography in all countries is going through
a period of transition. Nor is the number of words affected significant
enough to cause concern to the beginner, or even the intermediate-level
student.
Therefore, and to generalize, the main difference in terms of orthography
or spelling, when the 1992 agreement comes into force, is that the c or p
before a consonant (c, q or t) which is a remnant of the Portuguese Latin
root, will be maintained if pronounced and omitted if not pronounced.
There are also some modifications regarding hyphenation but these are best
dealt with using an updated dictionary, which is good advice, anyway,
when learning a new language.
In this essential grammar we have tried, as far as possible, to keep away
from 'controversial' words and examples, as our objective is to provide the
user with a brief, clear and neutral manual which, above all, stresses
the general rule more than the exception, and the common ground of the
Portuguese variants, rather than their idiosyncrasies.
Pronunciation
The two main differences in patterns of pronunciation between Brazilian
and European Portuguese lie in the tendency to open most vowels in the
former and a difference in rhythm or intonation. Brazilian Portuguese is
more 'musical' and uses fewer fricative sounds, as the final s is usually
pronounced as 's' or 'z' instead of 'sh' or 'j' as in the European variant.
European Portuguese may sound a little harsher to the beginner because
of the more strongly marked contrast between the open vowels in the
stressed syllable and the closed and unvoiced vowels in unstressed and final
syllables.
Some vowels and consonants are pronounced differently depending on
their position in the word, as we point out below.
Bl.l
Bl.l.l
Vowels
Oral vowels
Example
e in final position cheque
o stressed o before m or n Antonio
Pronounced os
shaky
took
Consonants
Diphthongs
d before i, or e when pronounced as
I final position = diphthongs
au, eu, iu
s at end of syllable/word if followed by
unvoiced consonant (t, c, f, p,)
at end of syllable/word if followed by
voiced consonant (b, d, g, m, n, r)
t before i, or e when pronounced as
z final
verdade
dia
Portuga/
pape/
funi/
estou
mosca
fosforos
rasgar
mais da
mesmo
cisne
Israel
tio
pente
luz
edgy
geography
Gower
phew
(approximate)
Europe
tourist
mosque
phosphor
meus pais vespers
Lisboa Lisbon
let's go
Dresden
mesmerize
Osnabruck
Israel
cheek
peachy
loss
BI.3
Bl.3.2
Diphthongs
Nasal diphthongs
Brazilian nasal diphthongs seem to have more nasal resonance than their
European Portuguese equivalents.
209
B2.4.I
Diminutives and augmentatives
Diminutives are used more frequently in Brazilian Portuguese than
in other variants.
B2.4.3
Brazilian Portuguese favours diminutives in -inho and -zinho in
preference to -ito.
Use of the definite article
B3.2. 1 With first names
In Brazilian Portuguese the use of the definite article is optional with
forenames and surnames, especially if referring to some well-known
personality:
Joao disse que vinha mais tarde.
Joao said he was coming later.
O Nelson chega amanha.
Nelson arrives tomorrow.
Jorge Amado e dos autores brasileiros mais conhecidos.
Jorge Amado is one of the best-known Brazilian writers.
B3.2.2 With titles
The definite article is frequently omitted before the title D. (dona)
D. Margarida ja saiu. Mrs ... has already left.
B3.2.5 Before possessive adjectives
The definite article is also frequently omitted before possessive adjectives:
Nosso carro quebrou. Our car has broken down.
Chapter B4
Adjectives
B4. 1 . 1 .2 Adjectives ending in -eu have a feminine form in -eia:
In Brazilian Portuguese the word europeia is written with an acute accent.
Degree
B4.3.I
The comparative
tao . . . quanto B is the comparative preferred in Brazil to express
equality.
B4.3.3
Special comparative and superlative forms
In Brazilian Portuguese, menor 'smaller' is the correct comparative for
pequeno 'small'. The equivalent superlative relative is o menor.
Personal pronouns
B5. / . / Subject pronouns
Tu and vos are hardly ever used in Brazil. They have been superseded by
voce, voces, o senhor and its variants a senhora, os senhores, as senhoras.
Tu may be used in some regions of the south and the northeast of Brazil,
sometimes as an indefinite subject such as 'one', 'anyone', 'a person'. If
used, it is frequently combined with a verbal form in the third person
singular, instead of second person. This is an extremely colloquial use of
the pronoun and, as it is grammatically incorrect, it should be avoided.
Tu vai ao banco e todo mundo quer saber.
You go to the bank and everybody wants to know about it.
B5.I.I.I As a rule, personal pronouns are more frequently used in
Brazilian Portuguese than in European Portuguese.
B5. 1.2 Direct object pronouns
Vos is hardly ever used in Brazil. Voces is the preferred form. O senhor, a
senhora, os senhores, as senhoras can also be used as direct object
pronouns. Te (singular only) is used as a direct object in colloquial speech
referring back to voce:
Ela viu voces no teatro.
She saw you at the theatre.
Eles convidaram os senhores para jantar.
They have invited you for dinner.
213
Nos te procuramos la, mas voce nao nos viu. 1
We looked for you there but you didn't see us.
1 This colloquial use of te and voce in the same sentence, referring to the same
grammatical subject is considered incorrect. This use is only possible in very
informal speech.
B5.I.2. 1 In Brazilian Portuguese, direct object pronouns follow roughly
the same rules as in European Portuguese, but they enjoy far greater
freedom in matters of word order.
(e) With single infinitives it is possible to place the pronoun after the verb,
even in a negative sentence:
Para nao incomoda-lo mais ela preferiu se calar.
In order not to upset him further, she decided to be quiet.
(f) In phrases where a main verb is used as an auxiliary the pronoun can
also come after the main verb of the sentence, be it in the Infinitive or
Present Participle, even if it is a negative sentence:
Ela nao queria ve-lo mais.
She didn't want to see him again.
(g) In phrases where a main verb is used as an auxiliary it is also possible
to place the pronoun between that auxiliary and the proper main verb
in the sentence/clause, usually an Infinitive:
Eles querem nos ver imediatamente.
They want to see us immediately.
(h) In compound tenses it is also possible to place the pronoun between
the auxiliary and the main verb, usually a Participle:
As criancas tinham se perdido no centro da cidade.
The children had got lost in the centre of town.
(i) When two or more verbs share the same subject pronoun, the pronoun
only needs to be stated once, followed by the verbs:
Heitor a encontrou e levou para casa.
Heitor found it and took it home.
14
B5.I.2.2 (d) In Brazilian Portuguese sempre can only mean 'always'. The
subject pronoun voce followed by third person of the verbal form is also
preferred:
Voce sempre a leva para Leiria?
Do you always take her to Leiria?
Sempre o vi na biblioteca ontem.
I saw him in the library all day yesterday.
B5.I.2.3 With Future and Conditional tenses it is possible to place the
pronoun before the verb in main affirmative sentences instead of fitting it
between the stem and the ending, as is the norm in European Portuguese:
N6s o receberemos com muito gosto.
We will receive it with pleasure.
Rita nos reconheceria em qualquer lugar.
Rita would recognize us anywhere.
B5. 1.3 Indirect object pronouns
These follow roughly the same rules as direct object pronouns. Vos is
hardly ever used in Brazil. Voces is the preferred form but in this case it
needs to be introduced by a preposition. The same applies to o senhor, a
senhora, os senhores, as senhoras, used in more formal circumstances. Te
(singular only) is used as an indirect object in colloquial speech and refers
back to voce:
Quern deu esse presente para voce?
Who gave you that present?
Eu escrevi uma carta para voces.
I have written a letter to you.
O empregado da a chave do quarto aos senhores.
The attendant gives you the bedroom key.
Nao te disse que ela vinha?
Didn't I tell you she would come?
B5. 1.5 Prepositional pronouns
Ti, si and vos are hardly ever used in Brazil. Voce and voces are the
preferred equivalent forms:
Tenho um presente para voce. I have a present for you.
Tenho presentes para voces. I have presents for you.
Si in Brazilian Portuguese has a reflexive quality.
Ela e egoista. So pensa em si.
She is selfish. She only cares about herself.
Ele esta em outro planeta! Vive falando consigo mesmo!
He lives on another planet! He is always talking to himself.
B5.I.5.2 With the prepositions com, em and de, some prepositional
pronouns change their form:
com + mim = comigo com + nos = conosco 1
com + ti = contigo
1 Note the Brazilian spelling.
Consigo and convosco are not used in Brazilian Portuguese.
B5./.6
Reflexive pronouns
These follow roughly the same rules as direct object pronouns. Te and vos
are seldom used in Brazil. Se is the preferred equivalent form in both cases
as it corresponds to third person singular and plural:
Voce se preocupa em demasia. You worry too much.
Voces se levantam muito cedo. You get up very early.
Possessive pronouns and adjectives
In Brazilian Portuguese, the definite article is frequently omitted before
possessive adjectives but there is a preference for using the definite article
with possessive pronouns, especially in structures containing the verb ser
and when emphasis is on an item one wishes to distinguish from another:
Possessive adjective Possessive pronoun
Minnas malas sao pesadas. As malas pesadas sao as
minhas (nao as leves).
My suitcases are heavy. The heavy suitcases are mine
(not the light ones).
Note: As malas pesadas sao minhas, without the definite article, makes the
same statement but without stressing that it is the heavy cases, as opposed
to the light ones.
B5.2. / Possessive adjectives Possessive
pronouns and
(O) teu, (a) tua, (os) teus, (as) tuas and especially (o) vosso, (a) vossa, (os) adjectives
vossos, (as) vossas are seldom used in Brazil. (O) seu, (a) sua, (os) seus,
(as) suas are the preferred equivalent forms and correspond to the personal
pronouns voce, voces. In a colloquial register, it is also possible to use de
voce, de voces as possessive adjectives.
Sua filha e muito simpatica.
Your daughter is very nice.
Voces sairam com seus amigos.
You went out with your friends.
B5.2.2 Possessive pronouns
O teu, a tua, os teus, as tuas and o vosso, a vossa, os vossos, as vossas are
seldom used in Brazil. O seu, a sua, os seus, as suas are the preferred equiv-
alent forms and correspond to the personal pronouns voce, voces. In a
colloquial register, it is also possible to use o/a/os/as de voce, o/a/os/as de
voces.
Essa mala e a sua (nao aquela).
This is your suitcase (not the other one), (selection)
Essas malas sao nossas, mas aquelas sao as de voces.
These suitcases are ours but those are yours, (selection)
Essas malas sao nossas, mas aquelas sao de voces.
These suitcases are ours but those are yours, (possession only)
217
Chapter B6
Numerals
Q Cardinal, ordinal and multiplicative numbers
As a rule these coincide in all variants of Portuguese, but in Brazilian
Portuguese, some cardinals are written differently:
1 4 quatorze or catorze
1 6 dezesseis
1 7 dezessete
1 9 dezenove
Verbs
The main difference between Brazilian Portuguese and other variants of the
language is that in Brazil 'true' second person verbal forms are seldom used,
because, as seen above (B5.1.1), tu and vos have been replaced by voce and
voces (also o senhor, a senhora, os senhores, as senhoras) which require
verbal forms in the third person. Some modern grammars and language
courses in Brazilian Portuguese as a foreign language have even ceased to
register second person verbal forms.
B7.4
B7.4.I
Imperative mood
Conjugation
In Brazilian Portuguese, as subject pronouns tu and vos are seldom used
(see B5.1.1), all forms of the Imperative are borrowed from the Present
Subjunctive.
Present participle
Estar + Present Participle is the preferred form for Progressive tenses:
Eu estava trabalhando quando voce me interrompeu.
I was working when you disturbed me.
Reflexive verbs
As second person pronouns are seldom used in Brazilian Portuguese (B5.1.1,
B5.1.6, B7), second person forms are also seldom used with these verbs.
B7. 12. 1.2 In Brazilian Portuguese when the reflexive pronoun stands
between the auxiliary and the main verb, it does not require a hyphen (see
B5.1.2.1g):
Posso me sentar aqui? Can I sit here?
B7. 1 2. 1 .3 In Brazilian Portuguese, with Future and Conditional tenses, it
is possible to place the pronoun before the verb in main positive sentences
instead of fitting it between the stem and the ending, as is the norm in
European Portuguese (see B5.1.2.3):
Eles se arrependerao disso.
They will regret it.
As crian^as se cansariam muito depressa.
The children would soon be tired.
Note: Although the Conditional is used more frequently in Brazilian
Portuguese than in the European variant of the language, the Future is
extremely rare.
BI0.4
Verbs followed by a preposition
In colloquial Brazilian Portuguese ir em is preferred when expressing place
being visited, usually a local place. Some grammarians, however, consider
this use incorrect:
Este Verao eu vou em Araxa.
I am going to Araxa this Summer.
(also p'ra Araxa, which is rather colloquial)
As a rule, in Brazilian Portuguese the preposition de is omitted when the
verb precisar is followed by an infinitive.
Preciso ir ao supermercado.
I need to go to the supermarket
When the verb precisar is followed by a noun, or by a pronoun or equiva-
lent, the preposition de must be used, just like in European Portuguese:
Preciso de farinha.
I need some flour.
Preciso de voce.
I need you.
Chapter Bl I
Additional notes on
Brazilian Portuguese usage
|jm Gente/a gente
In colloquial Brazilian Portuguese gente can also mean 'folks'. But
remember that it cannot be used as a subject pronoun - it is a vocative:
Ele fez isso de proposito, gente.
He did that on purpose, folks.
A/para
In Brazilian Portuguese the preposition em, in colloquial speech, can convey
both meanings.
Eu vou em Sao Paulo em viagem de negocios.
(and I am coming back soon)
Eu vou em Sao Paulo.
(one assumes that I do not know when I will be back)
Note: It is also possible to say para.
Bl I.I I
Prepositions with means of transport
Some means of transport have different names in Brazilian Portuguese:
de onibus, metro, trolebus, trem
by bus, underground, tram, train
Bl 1.12
Word order
B / 1.12.1 Pronouns and verbs
In Brazilian Portuguese word order rules for object pronouns are not as
rigid as in European Portuguese (see above, B5. 1.2.1):
Ela me telefonou e escreveu uma carta.
She phoned me and sent me a letter.
Ela tinha me escrito uma carta.
She had sent me a letter.
Ela me escrevera uma carta. 1
She will send me a letter.
Ela me escreveria uma carta.
She would send me a letter.
1 This example is only for purposes of illustration, as the future Tense is seldom
used in Brazilian Portuguese (see B7.12.1.3).
B 1 1.12.5 Adverbs
(c) Adverbs of time or place are placed before or after verbs:
Sempre is never used in Brazilian Portuguese with the meaning of 'finally',
regardless of its position in the phrase:
Eu viajo sempre de aviao.
Eu vou sempre a China.
Eu sempre vou a China.
I always travel by plane.
I always go to China.
I always go to China.
223
Chapter BI2
Socializing
BI2.I
BI2.I.I
General greetings
Oi! Hello!, Hi!, Hey!
Oi is the most used form for 'hello' in Brazil. It can be used to open up a
conversation.
- Oi! Voce tern a revista Vejal
Hey! Have you got Veja magazine?
- Nao, ja vendi tudo.
No, I am sold out.
Oi can also be used to show that one is paying attention when being
addressed by another person:
- Viviane! Voce me faz um favor?
Viviane! Will you do me a favour?
- Oi, pois nao!
Why, of course!
Viva is almost never used in Brazilian Portuguese.
BI2.2
Bl 2.2.1
Taking leave
Adeus in Brazil is used mostly in poetry and other literature. It is seldom
'24 used in colloquial communication unless in stories or songs. The most
common term for farewell in Brazilian Portuguese is Tchau!, 'Bye!/ Forms
Cheerio!' address
Ate logo in Brazilian Portuguese has the same meaning as an informal
'goodbye'. Brazilians use this expression even when they know they are not
going to meet later in the day.
The forms ate para a semana/mes/ano are not used in Brazilian Portuguese.
The preferred forms are ate a semana/o mes/o ano que vent.
Ate sempre is not used in Brazilian Portuguese. Ate mais is the preferred
form.
B 1 2.2. I.I For other leave-taking formulas, see information in 12.2.1.1.
BI2.2.2
More formal farewells, figurative
Despedir-se is not considered formal in Brazilian Portuguese and it is more
frequently used than the expression dizer adeus.
BI2.4
Attracting attention
Por favor is preferred in Brazil instead of faga favor.
Gargon! is the usual way to call 'Waiter!'
Saying pst in Brazil, depending on the place and circumstances, can be
considered very rude.
BI2.4.3
Call for help
In Brazil the preferred expression is Pega ladrao! (Stop thief!)
BI2.I0
Forms of address
In Brazil, the most widely used form of address is voce and voces. Brazilians
use voce to the extent of mixing it with other forms of address in the same
sentence:
D. Lina, tenho um presentinho para voce.
225
BI2 or
Socializing D . L ina, tenho urn presentinho para a senhora.
Mrs ... I have a little present for you.
The impact of voce is so great that a few years ago a Brazilian president
gave a good dressing down to a journalist who first addressed him as
Senhor Presidente and then allowed a voce to slip through, instead of using
Vossa Excelencia as a pronoun, as was required.
Tu is seldom used, only in some regions by certain sectors of the popula-
tion, and is often incorrectly combined with verbal forms in the third
person, as people regard tu as more informal, but are not used to employing
a verbal form in the second person singular (see B5.1.1). As stated above,
this use should be avoided.
V6s is even more rarely used, and is almost exclusively a form of address
reserved for God in one's prayers.
Bl 2.10.2 Less informal
In Brazilian Portuguese it is not possible to use the name of the person
being spoken to as a subject pronoun, as is frequently the case in European
Portuguese. A Brazilian, on being addressed by his/her own name, will
instinctively think that the speaker is referring to someone else who
happens to have the same name. As voce is widely accepted as a form of
address for most people, except on formal occasions, it does not need to
be avoided and a speaker of Brazilian Portuguese does not need to find
other alternatives, as a European speaker would in the same circumstances.
Nevertheless, when wishing to address someone amidst a group of people,
the way to single that person out is to use the name as a vocative and then
continue with the sentence or question desired, using voce as the subject:
- Carlos, voce ja viu esse filme?
Carlos, have you already seen that film?
- Francisco e Daniela, como voces estao de visita, nao
querem vir tambem?
Francisco and Daniela, as you are here on a visit, wouldn't you like
to come too?
- Nos gostanamos 1 muito de ver um filme portugues. Voce e
muito amavel em nos convidar. Pode nos dar carona para
o cinema?
We would love to see a Portuguese film. It is very kind of you to
invite us. Can you give us a lift to the cinema?
1 Note the preference for the Conditional when expressing a wish or request in
Brazilian Portuguese.
In a colloquial register, if o senhor is being used before a forename, it can
assume the form of seu:
- Seu Juca, que surpresa encontrar o senhor por aqui.
Mr . . . what a surprise to meet you here.
- E verdade seu Tristao.
That's right, Mr . . .
B 1 2. 1 0.3 Formal
In Brazilian Portuguese o senhor and the variants a senhora, os senhores,
as senhoras are the other most current forms of expressing a second person
subject, in this case with more formal overtones. These can also be used as
object pronouns.
Senhorita 'Miss' can be used as a title for single (unmarried) women, but
usually in a formal register. It is rarely used in spoken Portuguese and can
have pejorative connotations. Unlike European Portuguese, in Brazilian
Portuguese a menina cannot be used as a title for a single (unmarried)
woman. The same applies to o menino, os meninos, as meninas even if one
wishes to address children. Voce, voces would be the preferred forms.
Married and middle-aged women without a higher-education degree or a
professional title are usually addressed as Dona followed by their first name.
Other ways of saying 'you': Vossa Senhoria, (V.S. a ) is still used in Brazil,
although almost exclusively in formal letter writing, to address high-
ranking civil servants and members of the armed forces, whereas in
Portugal it has become obsolete.
BI2.I0.4
Titles
In general terms, titles in Brazilian Portuguese tend to coincide with usage
in other Portuguese variants.
BI2
Socializing
B 1 2. 1 0.5 Family
Brazilians prefer the following affectionate terms of address:
papai, mamae daddy, mummy
vovo, vovo grandad, granny
titio, titia uncle, auntie
Note: In Brazilian Portuguese none of these forms can be used as subjects,
only as vocatives. If a subject or object pronoun is required, the preferred
forms are voce(s) and o senhor, a senhora, etc.:
- Titio, nos gostavamos muito que o senhor e Titia
viessem jantar em nossa casa.
Uncle, we would really like you and Auntie to come and have
dinner at our house.
- Pois nao, Zeca, com muito gosto.
Of course, Zeca, we would be delighted.
BI2.I I
Talking about one's health
B 1 2. 1 I.I In small talk and greetings
Menos mal in Brazilian Portuguese is not used to talk about one's health.
It means that a situation is not too bad, or fairly lucky:
Menos mal que a greve nao incluiu os servicos medicos.
Luckily the strike did not include health care.
B 1 2. 1 1 .2.4 Asking what you can/should do
In Brazilian Portuguese the preferred expressions are:
Posso . . . (levar uma vida normal, continuar minha vida
normalmente, beber, comer de tudo, etc.)?
Can I . . . (carry on as normal, drink, eat anything, etc.)?
B 1 2. 1 2.4 Place of residence and addresses
Talking about
the weather
The preferred form in Brazilian Portuguese is:
Qual e o seu endereco? What is your address?
BI2.I3
Talking about the weather
As continuous tenses are built with the main verb in the Present Participle
in Brazilian Portuguese, weather expressions requiring this sort of tense
differ somewhat from European Portuguese:
Esta
chovendo.
It is raining.
Esta
nevando.
It is snowing.
Esta
trovejando.
There is a thunderstorm.
Esta
relampejando.
It is lightning.
Esta
fazendo sol.
The sun is shining.
Esta
ventando.
The wind is blowing.
Esta
fazendo frio.
It is rather cold.
- Esta fazendo muito frio aqui em Sao Paulo.
It is very cold here in Sao Paulo.
- Eu nao acho, voce e que vem la do Recife e nao esta
habituado.
I don't think so, but as you come from Recife, you are not used
to it.
When speaking about a rise in temperature, the verb esquentar is more
usual in Brazilian Portuguese, although aquecer is preferred in written
language.
229
Exchanging factual
information
BI3.I
BI3.I.4
Identifying people
Profession, occupation
As in Brazilian Portuguese there is a tendency not to invert the order of the
subject and the verb in questions, it is preferable to ask:
O que o seu primo faz? What does your cousin do?
122] Asking for information
As word order in Brazilian Portuguese can be far more flexible than
in European Portuguese, especially in relation to object pronouns (see
B5. 1.2.1), some requests for information may present a slightly different
word order:
Pode me dizer . . . (sentence with interrogative)?
Could you tell me ... ?
Me diga . . . (sentence with interrogative), por favor.
Can you please tell me ... ?
Sabe me dizer . . . (sentence with interrogative)?
Could you tell me ... ?
BI3.5
Letter writing
Letter writing
B 1 3.5. 1 Dates
In Brazilian Portuguese months are written in lower case:
Salvador, 30 de novembro de 1998
Salvador, 30 November 1998
B 1 3.5.2 Opening formulas
B 1 3.5.2. 1
Formal: II m °( a ) Senhor(a) may be preferred in Brazilian
Portuguese.
231
Chapter BI4
Getting things done
Inviting others to do something
In Brazilian Portuguese, conosco is usually replaced by com a gente, for
example:
- David, voce tambem quer vir com a gente?
David, do you want to come with us too?
[^mU Requesting assistance
As word order in Brazilian Portuguese can be far more flexible than in
European Portuguese, especially in relation to object pronouns (see
B5. 1.2.1), some requests for assistance may present slightly different word
order:
Me ajude a + (phrase with Infinitive) Help me to . . .
Pode me ajudar a + (phrase with Would you help me to ... ?
Infinitive)?
Me de uma ajuda. Give me a hand.
- Me ajude a lavar o carro, por favor.
Help me wash the car, please.
- Esta bem, mas depois voce tambem me da uma ajudinha
com o jardim.
All right, but afterwards you give me a hand in the garden too.
BI4.I2
Enquiring about and expressing intention,
want or desire
In Brazilian Portuguese, use pretender, although tencionar is acceptable in
literature. One can also use ter intengao de.
- O que voce pretende fazer quando terminar o curso?
What do you intend to do when you have finished your degree?
Enquiring
about and
expressing
intention,
want or
desire
233
Finding out about and
expressing intellectual
attitudes
Incomprehension and clarification
As continuous tenses in Brazilian Portuguese are built with the main verb
in the Present Participle, sentences explaining your present lack of clarifi-
cation or state of confusion also require a Present Participle:
Nao estou entendendo nada. I do not understand a thing.
- Aquilo foi tudo uma grande confusao, mas no fim tudo
deu certo. Voce esta vendo?
That was all a huge mess but in the end it all worked out all
right. Do you see?
- Nao, eu nao estou vendo nada. Voce pode explicar melhor?
No, I don't see it at all. Can you explain it better?
Certainty and uncertainty
Nao estou vendo nada.
I do not understand/see at all.
Nao estou sabendo de nada.
I do not know anything.
Nao tenho certeza (without the article) is the preferred form in Brazilian
Portuguese.
BI6.2
Expressing displeasure or dislike
In Brazilian Portuguese embirrar has a different connotation. It means that
a person is refusing to speak just to make a point. For example:
Nem adianta falar com ela! Esta embirrada desde cedo!
It is no good speaking to her! She has been sulking all along!
Minha Nossa Senhora! Golly! Gosh!
These exclamations seem to be a short form of Minha vida! or Minha Nossa
Expressing hope
In Brazilian Portuguese, quern dera is not used by itself as an exclamation,
but as an expression to introduce a deep wish. The same use can be found
in European Portuguese.
Quern dera eu tivesse dinheiro! Tirava toda a familia da
miseria!
I wish I had money! I would get the whole family out of poverty!
Expressing surprise
Minha!/Nossa!
Oh, my!
Senhora!
BI6
Judgement
and
evaluation
B 16. 14
Apologizing
Fila is the correct word for 'queue' in Brazil.
BI6.I7
Expressing regret
In Brazilian Portuguese the preposition a is omitted and one only exclaims
serio? instead of a serio? in order to express incredulity.
PART IV
Historical and cultural
notes
Chapter 18
The Portuguese language
and the cultures of the
Portuguese-speaking world
Portuguese: an international language
Portuguese is at present the seventh most spoken language in the world. It
is the official language of some 200m people in eight countries spanning
four continents: Portugal, where it originates, in Europe; Brazil, the largest
country and economy in South America; Angola, Mozambique, Guinea-
Bissau, Cape Verde, and Sao Tome e Principe in Africa; and East Timor in
Australasia.
Portuguese is also spoken in the North Atlantic archipelagos of Madeira
and the Azores. These are autonomous regions of Portugal and not
colonies, because they were uninhabited islands settled in the fifteenth
century by people of European stock, mostly Portuguese. A small commu-
nity of descendants of the Portuguese in the city of Malacca in Western
Malaysia still speak Portuguese. The same is the case of the city of Goa in
western India, and in Macau, a Portuguese territory in South East China
until the year 2000.
Portuguese is also used by small communities of emigrants scattered around
the world in countries such as the USA, Venezuela, France, the UK,
Switzerland, Luxembourg and South Africa.
1 8. 1. 1 Portuguese as an official language
The importance of Portuguese in the world today is reflected in the number
of major international organizations which have adopted it as an official
language:
• The European Union (EU), an organization of 15 European Countries
linked by common economic, trade and development policies. 239
• The Africa Caribbean Pacific Secretariat (ACP), an assembly within
the EU representing 77 countries, all former colonies of members of
the European Union.
• The African Union (AU), an independent organization modelled on the
European Union and which aims for the peaceful cooperation and
development of African countries.
• The Southern African Development Community (SADC), a group of
14 African countries cooperating for the development of the region.
• The Organization of American States (OAS), the world's oldest
regional organization dating back to 1889-90.
• The Southern Common Market (MERCOSUL), an organization
whose objectives are the cooperation and development of South
American countries for the establishment of a common market
through trade liberalization.
• Partners of the Americas, a people-to-people organization promoting
development, education, health, job training and the protection of the
environment and of human rights through partnership programmes
between nations in the Americas.
As an international language, Portuguese has an interesting advantage: as
a rule, speakers of Portuguese can easily understand Spanish. Spanish
speakers, however, show greater difficulty in understanding Portuguese.
18.1.2 Variants of Portuguese
There are two main variants of Portuguese - European Portuguese, as
spoken and pronounced in Portugal, and Brazilian Portuguese, which
presents some divergences, as explained in Chapter 17. These divergences
arise from the influence of native Indian languages in Brazil, the African
dialects of the slaves brought to work in the sugar plantations in the seven-
teenth and eighteenth centuries, as well as from the influence of the
languages of other Europeans who emigrated to Brazil, mainly during the
nineteenth century. Like the English spoken in the USA, Brazilian
Portuguese also shows a degree of grammatical simplification as well as the
preservation of some archaisms.
The Portuguese spoken in Angola, Mozambique, Cape Verde, Sao Tome e
Principe and Guinea-Bissau, a group of countries often referred to as the
PALOPs (Paises Africanos de Lingua Oficial Portuguesa), is closer to
European Portuguese. This is because a strong Portuguese presence was felt
until 1975, the date when all these countries became independent.
Inevitably, there is an African variety of Portuguese in development, which
shows the influence of African dialects, as well as a process of grammat-
ical simplification, as noted above in Brazilian Portuguese. The people of
Cape Verde and Guinea-Bissau also speak types of Creole deriving from old
Portuguese combined with African dialects. Cape Verdean Creole can be
readily enjoyed in the songs of Cesaria Evora, who has become a singer of
international acclaim.
W "The origins of Portuguese
The history of the Portuguese language is intimately connected with the
history of Portugal and its antecedents. Portuguese derives mainly from
Latin. Not classical Latin, but the Latin spoken by the Roman soldiers who
subdued the peoples of the Iberian Peninsula, combined with the local
dialects. Some of the peoples who established themselves in the Peninsula
as the Roman Empire crumbled away were of German origin (Suevi, Goths
and Visigoths) and so Portuguese has a number of words of Germanic
origin (like guerra and feltro, for instance). Berber peoples from North
Africa invaded the Iberian Peninsula in 711 and also left their strong
imprint on the language. Most place names beginning with the letters 'al'
are of Arabic origin. The same applies to agricultural products and tech-
nology brought by the Arabs to the Peninsula, of which alface (lettuce) and
nora (a large wheel with buckets attached, powered by a donkey or mule)
are examples.
During the Middle Ages, the amalgam of the colloquial Latin spoken by
Roman soldiers and traders and the local dialects evolved into various
Romance languages, one of them being Galician-Portuguese. This is the
conventional name given by linguists to the language spoken in the western
fringe of the Iberian Peninsula until the second quarter of the fourteenth
century. That region corresponds to what is nowadays modern Portugal,
and the autonomous region of Galicia in north-west Spain. The political
independence of Portugal, proclaimed by Afonso Henriques in 1143, initi-
ated a simultaneous cultural separation from the other regions in western
Iberia. Two hundred years later, the linguistic differences found in Galicia
and Portugal are significant enough for specialists to consider the date of
1325 as the end of Galician-Portuguese as such, and to mark its develop-
ment into two separate languages. This conventional landmark is the date
of the death of King Dinis of Portugal, one of the major lyrical poets of 24
the period. Curiously enough, until then, most lyrical poetry in the Iberian
Peninsula was written in Galician-Portuguese, whereas epic works tended
to be written in Castilian. Even in the later Middle Ages and the
Renaissance period it was not unusual for Portuguese poets to write in
Castilian.
The age of exploration and of the great navigations, which began in
the late fourteenth century, brought Portuguese to the four corners of the
world. Portuguese both influenced and was influenced by languages from
remote parts of the planet. Malay, for instance, still has in its current vocab-
ulary many words of Portuguese origin. Some Portuguese influence can also
be found in Japanese, as the Portuguese were the first Europeans to travel
to Japan. Equally, there are many words from South American dialects,
which have left their mark, especially from Tupi, a sort of lingua franca
spoken by Brazilian Indians and used by Portuguese settlers in the first
stages of the colonization of Brazil. Many words of African origin can
equally be found in Portuguese, as a result of the need to refer to objects,
flora and fauna unknown to the European Portuguese speaker.
In the sixteenth century, Camoes became to the Portuguese language what
Shakespeare is to English, although the former is better known for his
poetry and the latter for his plays. After Camoes, Portuguese became a
modern and sensitive linguistic instrument of communication, with a rich
vocabulary reflecting its Classical Roman and Greek origins, and structured
by a complex syntax. It was capable of transmitting a gamut of concepts
and experiences from the precise description of new elements, to philo-
sophical abstractions, or the artistic expression of the most subtle human
feelings and longings.
Portuguese is nowadays a modern language for international and scientific
communication. All branches of the sciences are taught in Portuguese in
the universities of Lusophone countries. Inevitably, English has a great
influence, especially in the areas of advanced technology, as new concepts
and their respective terminology are currently being developed for the most
part in Anglophone countries. The tendency to readily adopt words of
foreign origin, mainly Anglicisms and Galicisms, is more prevalent in Brazil
than in Portugal. Whereas a Brazilian scientist or media person will easily
add a Portuguese ending to a foreign word, his/her Portuguese counterpart
is more likely to strive to find a solution within the boundaries and cap-
abilities of the Portuguese language.
18
Language and
culture
18.3
Portuguese: cultural expressions
Portuguese is a rich cultural language, used in the expression of various
literatures spanning over eight centuries and eight countries scattered
around the globe and, therefore, it presents contrasts and diversity.
18.3.1 Literature
The first literary works written in Portuguese are medieval poems recorded
in songbooks known as cancioneiros. These date from the early fourteenth
century, although the poems may have originated at an earlier date. The
development of Portuguese literature in general follows similar periods,
trends and movements as those found in the rest of Europe, albeit with
some variations and at later dates. The work of Luis de Camoes is a land-
mark in the Portuguese Renaissance period with his epic poem Os
Lustadas, which, in a style influenced by classical poets such as Homer and
Virgil, tells the story of Vasco da Gama's discovery of the sea route to
India. In the nineteenth century, Romanticism is represented by Almeida
Garrett, Camilo Castelo Branco, Julio Diniz and the poetry of Augusto
Castilho, whereas Ega de Queiroz is an exponent of Realism, especially
with his masterpiece, the novel Os Maias. In the twentieth century
Fernando Pessoa is one of the most outstanding European poets and
literary critics; he used different heteronyms under which he wrote in a
wide variety of genres and styles. At present Portuguese literature is going
through a remarkable period of creativity and innovation with writers such
as Jose Saramago (the 1998 Nobel Prize winner), Lidia Jorge, Agustina
Bessa-Luis, Helia Correia and many others.
Brazilian literature began by following Portuguese and European models
but in 1865, with Jose de Alencar's epic Guarani and the novel Iracema,
which present a romantic image of the Brazilian Indian, there is an attempt
to give it a true South American stamp. Machado de Assis marks the apogee
of the Brazilian realist novel with psychologically rich characters. The
search for a truly Brazilian literature, free of European boundaries while
simultaneously encompassing any influences and trends that Brazilian
writers deemed worthwhile, is represented by the work of Oswald de
Andrade and the modernist movement of the 1920s, self-proclaimed in
the Manifesto Antropofago. In the second half of the twentieth century,
Jorge Amado and his novels portraying the North Eastern communities of
Brazil in strong local colours became icons of Brazilian literature. Other
18
Language and
culture
outstanding writers focusing on the idiosyncrasies and existential problems
of 'nordestino' Brazilian society are Raquel de Queiros, Graciliano Ramos
and Jose Lins do Rego, who leads the reader into the complexities of life
within the confines of the sugar-cane plantation. Lygia Fagundes Telles
delves into the paths of memory and the fetters of family life in Sao Paulo,
whereas Clarice Lispector, with her surrealistic tales and narratives, shows
an incisive psychological analysis of her characters.
The Portuguese-speaking African countries are also producing a rich corpus
of literary production. Inevitably, much of the literature produced in
Portuguese-speaking Africa is either engagee, or contains close references
to the socio-political reality prevalent in each country either during their
armed struggle or the aftermath of independence and its long-lasting
consequences. Some representative examples are the works of the Angolans
Castro Soromenho, who gives a Classical treatment to African themes,
Pepetela, whose novels reflect his perplexed approach to the question of col-
lective identity and nation, or Manuel Rui's caricatures of social mobility.
Jose Craveirinha is the poet laureate of Mozambique, a nation of poets,
while Mia Couto's short stories deal with the dreams and aspirations of the
simple people of Mozambique who survive the post-independence civil
war. Lina Magaia, on the other hand, bluntly and accusingly speaks of the
horrors of the civil war, expressing a collective longing for reconstruction
and the rediscovery of innocence and the simple pleasures of just living
in peace.
The University of Exeter has an excellent web page on the Internet with a
bibliography on Lusophone African writers, with particular emphasis on
women writers.
18.3.2 Music
44
This is another varied world that will be opened to the new learner of
Portuguese. Actually, one of the best ways to learn and practise a language
is to listen to its music and songs and sing along. This practice improves
comprehension, pronunciation and intonation
Portuguese music is usually associated with fado. This is a strongly melodic
form of music, typical of the urban communities of Lisbon and Coimbra,
frequently sung by people known as fadistas, and accompanied by one or
more guitars. The Portuguese guitar is a 12-stringed instrument deriving
from the medieval lute and with affinities with the mandolin, though larger
in size. It has the same round shape and delicate sound. Fadistas are usually
accompanied by a guitarra (Portuguese guitar) and a viola (the usual
classical guitar of other cultures). It is often said that fado is the Portuguese
equivalent of the blues, as its main themes are extreme states of passion -
love, jealousy, spite, revenge - or inexorable powers that control
humankind - fate and destiny. These fados are rather slow and plangent in
tone. The most loved singer of this form of traditional fado is Amalia
Rodrigues, who died in 1998, but left a great legacy and a large collection
of recordings (O Melbor de Amalia, Valentim de Carvalho, 1995). Singers
like Cristina Branco, Misia and Dulce Pontes have been referred to as
Amalia's artistic heirs. Misia and Dulce Pontes, however, have gone further.
Although endowed with exquisite and powerful voices, extremely well
suited to fado, they have introduced some innovation, either in the musical
arrangement, accompaniment, or even in the creative lyrics that reflect
contemporary lyrical trends. These innovations, instead of undermining
the concept of fado, strengthen it because they give it a contemporary
dimension, typical of any real form of popular cultural expression, which
cannot be static. Other traditional fadistas are Alfredo Marceneiro, Carlos
Ramos, Fernando Farinha, Fernanda Maria, Cidalia Meireles, Maria Teresa
Noronha, and many others. Fado can occasionally be lively and humorous,
and no one explored that vein better than Herminia Silva. A good selection
of fados showing different styles by different singers can be found on the CD
The Story of Fado (Hemisphere, 1997).
The fado traditionally sung by the students of the University of Coimbra
is more of a ballad, frequently played and sung in serenades or on the steps
of the old cathedral, the 'Se Velha', marking special occasions in the acad-
emic cultural calendar such as the 'Queima das Fitas' in May. The Menano
brothers were well known fado singers. Jose Afonso also began his career
singing Coimbra fado, while still attending secondary school. His critical
position against the dictatorial Salazar regime turned him into a protest
singer who inspired the imagination of his generation. His most famous
composition is Grdndola Vila Morena, which was used as the code sign
for the onset of the democratic revolution of 25 April 1974. His nephew,
Joao Afonso, has become an excellent ballad writer. Although claiming
independence from his uncle's musical influence, Joao Afonso's style has a
similar sound, evoking the Coimbra ballad, and his lyrics have also refer-
ences to simple, popular characters. One of the greatest virtuoso Portuguese
guitar players ever is Carlos Paredes. He also progressed from a typical
Coimbra style of guitar playing to a melodic flow that has often been
equated to the essence of the Portuguese soul (O Melbor de Carlos Paredes,
Valentim de Carvalho, 1998). Antonio Chainho has achieved a similar
status although starting from his Lisbon fado roots.
The Portuguese folk musical tradition is extremely rich and varies widely
from region to region. Much of it is either to be danced, or to mark the
rhythm of specific tasks typical of agricultural work. The lyrics are simple
and frequently humorous. A good cross-section can be found on the CD
Musical Traditions of Portugal (Smithsonian/Folkways Recordings, 1994).
Whereas in the 1960s young people in urban Portugal tended to listen to
Anglo-Saxon rock music, in recent years, young people have expressed the
wish to listen to rock sung in Portuguese, and many new bands have
appeared. Curiously enough, many of the lyrics still reflect recurring themes
in the Portugese cultural tradition: the sea, ships, seagulls, ports, havens,
distance, parting, and the longing to return. It is also easy to find histor-
ical references either in the lyrics or the band's own name: El-Rei Dom
Sebastiao (King Sebastian, who disappeared in a disastrous battle in North
Africa), Ala dos Namorados (band with the same name as a legendary
group of combatants in the fourteenth century), Setima Legiao, (Seventh
Legion), Trovante (a play on the word 'troubadour'), etc.
Other popular rock bands are GNR, Radio Macau, Xutos & Pontapes,
Cla, Resistencia, Entre Aspas, Raima's Gang and others. A miscellany can
be found on the double CD Portugal ao Vivo (Valentim de Carvalho,
2002). It is worth listening to Rui Veloso and Joao Gil as solo singers or
band-leaders for the quality of their music and the originality of the lyrics.
Adelaide Ferreira was a rock singer, but recently recorded a collection of
ballads. A musical phenomenon of the past 10 years has been Madredeus.
The group has developed a unique sound, which combines the plangent
music and lyrics expected of a female fado singer with slow, often elec-
tronic instrumental arrangements. Madredeus has over the years won
international acclaim.
During the first three centuries of the Portuguese colonization of Brazil,
music was very closely related to religion: from the native Indian ritual
dances and the rhythms of the African slaves to the hymns of the priests
who had journeyed from Portugal with the aim of establishing the Catholic
Church. The only other source of music came from the fanfares of the
Portuguese army.
Music in Brazil went on to develop along two lines, either adapting the
European tradition or combining the sounds of European, indigenous and
African music. With the abolition of slavery in 1888 and the proclamation
of the Republic in 1889, and the growth of cities like Rio de Janeiro,
Salvador and Recife - all with significant black populations - the first two
forms of recognizably Brazilian music emerged: lundu (primarily the music
of the black population) and modinha (founded in the white, European
tradition).
With the end of slavery, and as the black communities of Brazil became
more visible in society, so their participation in music-making and perform-
ance increased, particularly in Carnival and samba. Around this time what
were later to become the samba schools began to appear in Rio.
The twentieth century saw music from the USA flood into the country but
the production of indigenous music continued, notably with the develop-
ment of the samba-cancao, a popular style, which emerged around the end
of the Second World War and often dwelt on loneliness as its theme,
bringing a more reflective sound than its predecessor.
Nevertheless, there were those who thought any form of samba out of date
and, in seeking a new sound, they created the bossa nova (musicians like
Joao Gilberto and Antonio Carlos Jobim). Although it was initially poorly
received, this slow, smooth rhythm soon gained in popularity and reached
out beyond Brazil's borders to the rest of the world. In the 1960s the bossa
nova incorporated elements of the traditional samba.
At the end of the 1960s Tropicalismo was born. With the prominent partici-
pation of the Bahia-born Caetano Veloso, alongside Gilberto Gil, Tom Ze
and others, Tropicalismo changed Brazilian music not through a new sound
per se but by challenging artistic and cultural attitudes. Although primarily
music-based, it became a cultural, and at times controversial, phenomenon
which went on to influence later generations. Since then Brazilian music
has gone on to embrace rock and pop but it is for the samba and bossa
nova that it is still most known worldwide.
Cafe Brazil (Teldec Classics International, 2001) is a CD where the
'grandmasters are joined by a new generation of Brazilian singers and
instrumentalists in a rediscovery of Choro, the precursor of Samba'. A good
selection of chorinho is played by the Grupo Som de Ouro in Chorinho
(Novo Esquema, 1980). The creator of bossa nova can be heard in Antonio
Carlos Jobim the composer of e Desafinado\ plays (Verve, The Desert Island
Library, 2000). His music can also be heard in a famous jazz arrangement
by Stan Getz and Joao Gilberto in Getz/Gilberto featuring Antonio Carlos
Jobim (Verve, The Desert Island Library, 2000).
The music of the Portuguese-speaking African countries shares common
features as a result of the legacy of many years as part of a group of nations
18
Language and
culture
under Portuguese rule, sharing the same culture and a relatively similar
combination of European Portuguese and African influences interspersed
with Brazilian. Brazilian music has always been very popular amongst
Portuguese-speaking audiences inside or outside Portugal and its erstwhile
colonial empire. Lusophone Africans enjoy listening to the music of any of
the other Portuguese-speaking countries, although the lyrics are often sung
in a form of Creole (Cape Verde or Guinea-Bissau), or in an African dialect
not necessarily comprehensible to the audience.
Cape Verdean music has very distinctive rhythms like the coladeira, or the
slow morna. These have recently acquired a wider audience thanks to the
performances of the internationally acclaimed Cesaria Evora. The music of
Guinea-Bissau may present elements with an Arabic sound quality evoking
modern artists of West Africa like Salif Keita. Angolan and Mozambican
music, on the other hand, seems to share more with rhythms and styles
popular in Zaire and South Africa. A good cross-section of music from
Lusophone Africa can be found on the CD An Afro-Portuguese Odyssey
(Putumayo World Music, 2002, ISBN 1587590611). An extremely inter-
esting miscellany of songs, styles, musicians and performances with
multinational blends inspired by the music of the Portuguese diaspora can
be found on the CD Onda Sonora: Red Hot + Lisbon (Red Hot, 1998).
18.3.3 Cinema
48
Although the Portuguese film industry is relatively small, it regularly partici-
pates in international festivals with some success.
In the first half of the twentieth century, directors such as Chianca de
Gracia (Aldeia da Roup a Branca, 1938), Jose Cottinelli Telmo (A Cangao
de Lisboa, 1933), Antonio Lopes Ribeiro (O Pai Tirano, 1941), Francisco
Ribeiro (O Patio das Cantigas, 1942) and Arthur Duarte (O Costa do
Castelo, 1943; A Menina da Radio, 1944; O Leao da Estrela, 1947; O
Grande Elias, 1950) produced a series of comedies of manners which
present a humourous and simultaneously idyllic view of Portuguese society.
These films are extremely entertaining, and valuable as documents of ways
of life that have already disappeared. At present they are enjoying a revival
and remastered copies are being made available to the wider public in video
form. Of the recent comedies, perhaps the most successful was Cronica dos
Pons Malandros (Fernando Lopes, 1984), portraying characters living
on the fringes of modern society, though possessing well-meaning and
entertaining personalities.
Manoel de Oliveira is probably one of the most successful Portuguese
directors, having received multiple international awards during his long
career. Eduardo Geada and Antonio da Cunha Telles are also directors and
producers of wide acclaim.
Adaptations of modern literary works of interest are the films Retalbos
da Vida de um Medico (Jorge Brum do Canto, 1962), based on a novel
by Fernando Namora, Uma Abelha na Chuva (Fernando Lopes, 1972),
from a novel by Carlos Oliveira, or Francisca (Manoel de Oliveira,
1981) from a novel by Agustina Bessa-Luis.
A recent Portuguese release is Esquece tudo o que te disse (Antonio
Ferreira, 2002), a film that deals with the disintegration of a Portuguese
family, whose members are divided between their modern disconnected
existence and their rural heritage.
Brazil has a strong and prolific film industry. The first feature film in Brazil
was the comedy Nbo Anastdcio Cbegou de Viagem, by Julio Ferrez Antonio
Campos, in 1908. Brazilian cinema also produced adaptations of famous lit-
erary works such as the epic O Guarani by Jose de Alencar in an adaptation
by Antonio Leal.
The cinema novo of the 1960s focused on acute national problems, which
ranged from conflicts in rural areas to human problems in the large cities.
It also produced film versions of important Brazilian novels such as Vidas
Secas, based on a novel by the northeastern writer Graciliano Ramos. More
recently, adaptations of Jorge Amado's novels can also be found in
Gabriela Cravo e Canela and Dona Flor e sens Dois Maridos. One of the
best films of the 1980s is the adaptation of Clarice Lispector's novel A Hot a
da Estrela (Susana Amaral, 1985).
Black Orpheus (Marcel Camus, 1959), which won a Palme d'Or in Cannes
and an Oscar as best foreign film, together with the more recent remake
Orfeu Negro (Carlos Diegues, 2000), are cinema adaptations of a play by
the poet Vinicius de Moraes. The theme is the myth of Orpheus and Eurydice
against the back-cloth of Carnival in the favelas of Rio. The 1959 version
launched Antonio Carlos Jobim's bossa nova beat onto the international
scene.
The favelas, ever growing shanty-towns inside and outside Brazil's urban
areas, and the gangs of abandoned children roaming the streets, have
become a focus of attention for directors who are not scared to address
serious social problems. Pixote, a Lei do mais Fraco (Hector Babenco,
1980), based on the novel Infdncia dos Mortos by Jose Louzeiro, is the
story of a young boy leading a group of other abandoned children in the
violent back streets of Rio. Cidade de Deus (Fernando Meirelles, 2002),
an adaptation of Paulo Lins' novel with the same title, took the interna-
tional critics by storm. Through the eyes of yet another child, is told the
story of one of the most dangerous favelas in Rio, its organized crime and
drug trade. The international success of this film is attributed to the blunt
presentation on screen of the deepening chasm that separates the haves and
the have-nots anywhere on the globe.
In the 1990s, when Brazilian cinema seemed to have entered a phase of
decline after losing its state protection, there was a wave of creativity and
renewal with films such as O Quatrilho (Fabio Barreto, 1994), Carlota
Joaquina (Carla Camurati, 1995), and more recently, Terra Estrangeira
(Walter Salles, 1996). The latter deals with the problems of two Brazilians
caught up in a criminal network in Portugal, feeling foreigners in a country
that speaks their native language. Central do Brasil, also directed by Walter
Salles (1998), has been a major success. Fernanda Montenegro won the
Silver Prize in Berlin for best actress. The film has stunning photography
as Dora (Fernanda Montenegro) and a young orphan travel across north-
eastern Brazil to find his father. Eu Tu Eles (Andrucha Waddington, 2000)
is also set in this story-rich region, telling the tale of a woman with three
husbands.
For complete relaxation, try Bossa Nova (Bruno Barreto, 1999). It is a
sophisticated and entertaining romantic comedy charmingly constructed
over a sound track with music by Antonio Carlos Jobim.
The African Lusophone countries have a nascent film industry. Never-
theless the director Flora Gomes from Guinea-Bissau has produced an
extremely interesting film, Mortu Nega (1988) focusing on the troubles of
a Guinean couple during the armed struggle for independence and the fact
that the end of the war does not bring them the quiet life and comfort that
they had longed for in their later years. Although combat is not shown in
the film, the audience can sense the atmosphere of war through the eyes
and anxieties of Diminga, the main female character. This is a situation
leading to problems and emotions also felt in countries such as Angola and
Mozambique. The film, however, is spoken in Guinean Creole.
The cultural notes in this chapter are intended only as a brief introduction
to the cultures of the countries where Portuguese is spoken. The objective
of the authors was to encourage the reader to discover a new and rich world,
and to share with the native speakers of Portuguese anywhere in the world
the same pleasures and dreams, which can only be expressed in artistic form.
We have not made references to Timor-Leste, or East Timor, because it
is an extremely young country still establishing its cultural institutions
after 25 years of Indonesian occupation. East Timor was a Portuguese
colony, on the Eastern side of an Australasian island, until 1975. When
Portugal withdrew its presence from the territory in the wake of the demo-
cratic revolution of April 1974, which brought to an end four decades of
dictatorship in Portugal, and East Timor declared itself an independent
state, it was invaded by Indonesia. There ensued a reign of terror with
sporadic acts of genocide until in 1999, through a referendum, the terri-
tory was able to give voice to its wish for self-determination. On 20 May
2002, East Timor finally became the eighth Portuguese-speaking country
in the world. When in 1999 Xanana Gusmao, now President of East Timor,
was released from prison by the Indonesian authorities, he made a moving
speech in Portuguese, as an affirmation of the cultural divide between East
Timorese and Indonesians, and an affiliation to the Portuguese-speaking
communities of the world. Xanana Gusmao is an acclaimed poet in his
own right.
Internet resources
The Internet has become a precious source of information on any subject,
anywhere in the world. Such information is published in most languages
including Portuguese. Unfortunately, many websites are liable to change
address or even disappear at short notice. For that reason, we have only
indicated some of the most reliable to serve as a starting point for readers.
Many search engines can find most subjects on the Internet:
• www.google.com is excellent for most subjects;
• www.sapo.pt is a Portugal specific search engine;
• www.yahoo.com.br, www.terra.com.br and www.uol.com.br are
dedicated to Brazil.
On cultural matters it is worthwhile visiting:
• www.instituto-camoes.pt - website of Instituto Camoes;
• www.bn.pt - website of the Biblioteca Nacional in Lisbon;
• www.brazil.org.uk - website of the Brazilian Embassy in London;
• www.brasilemb.org - website of the Brazilian Embassy in Washington
DC.
18
Language and
culture
Many newspapers and magazines in Portuguese are also available on the
Internet:
• www.publico.pt - Portuguese newspaper O Publico;
• www.rtp.pt - Online news provided by RTP, the main Portuguese TV
station;
• www.folha.uol.com.br/folha/ - Brazilian newspaper Folba on Line;
• wwwl.folha.uol.com.br/fsp/ - Brazilian newspaper Folba de Sao
Paulo;
• www.cnnemportugues.com/ - Online edition of CNN news in
Brazilian Portuguese.
The space below is for the reader to record the web addresses that prove
to be the most relevant to his/her interests.
Bibliography
Alves, Manuel dos Santos, Frontudrio da lingua portuguesa, Lisbon:
Livraria Popular de Francisco Franco, 1991.
Camara, J.R. and Mattoso, J., The Portuguese Language (English version
by Anthony J. Naro), Chicago: Chicago University Press, 1972.
Historia e estrutura da lingua portuguesa, Rio de Janeiro: Padrao
- Livraria Editora, 1979.
Casteleiro, Joao Malaca, Meira, Americo and Pascoal, Jose, Nivel limiar:
para o ensino [e] aprendizagem de portugues como lingua segunda [e]
lingua estrangeira, Strasbourg: Conseil d'Europe, Lisbon: Instituto de
Cultura e Lingua Portuguesa, 1988.
Cegalla, Domingos Paschoal, Novissima Gramdtica da Lingua Portuguesa
(com numerosos exercicios), Sao Paulo: Editorial Nacional, 1997.
Cintra, Luis F. Lindley, Sobre 'Formas de tratamento' na lingua
portuguesa, Lisbon: Livros Horizonte, 1986.
Coroa, Maria Luiza Monteiro Sales, O tempo nos verbos do portugues: uma
introducao a sua interpretacao semdntica, Brasilia: Thesaurus, 1985.
Cunha, Celso, Gramdtica do portugues contempordneo, Belo Horizonte:
Editora Bernardo Alvares, 1971.
Cunha, Celso and Cintra, Luis F. Lindley, Nova gramdtica do portugues
contempordneo, Lisbon: Edigoes Joao Sa da Costa, 1995.
Dias, Eduardo Mayone, Lathrop, Thomas A. and Rosa, Joseph G.,
Portugal: lingua e cultura, Los Angeles: Cabrilho Press, 1977.
Eberhard, Gartner, Estudos de Gramdtica Portuguesa, Biblioteca luso-
brasileira, vol. 12, Frankfurt: TFM, 2000.
Ellison, Fred P. and Matos, Francisco Gomes de, Modern Portuguese, New
York: Alfred A. Knopf, 1971.
Greenbaum, Sidney, An Introduction to English Grammar, London:
Longman, 1991.
Leite, Isabel Coimbra and Coimbra, Olga Mata, Portugues sem fronteiras,
Lisbon: Edigoes Tecnicas, 1989.
Mateus, Maria Helena Mira, Gramdtica da Lingua Portuguesa, Lisboa:
Caminho, 1989 and 1994.
Michael, Ian, English Grammatical Categories , Cambridge: Cambridge
University Press, 1970.
Nogueira, Rodrigo de Sa, Diciondrio de verbos Portugueses conjugados,
Lisbon: Livraria Classica Editora, 1986.
Quirk, Randolph, Greenbaum, Sidney, Leech, Geoffrey and Svartvik, Jan,
A Comprehensive Grammar of the English Language, New York:
Longman, 1985.
Relvas, Jose Maria, Gramdtica Portuguesa, Lisboa, Maputo: Livraria Leia
Comercial, 1990.
Rodrigues, Fernando Jose and Humphreys, Peter, Falar e aprender:
portugues para estrangeiros, Oporto: Porto Editora, 1993.
Willis, R.C., An Essential Course in Modern Portuguese, London: Harrap,
1971.
This index includes: (a) grammatical terms which are used in the grammar
or commonly used in reference grammars or descriptions of Portuguese;
(b) English grammatical words such as 'whatever'; (c) words referring to
language functions.
Note: Section number preceded by a capital 'B' indicates that there is a
corresponding item in Part III: Brazilian variants.
a 'at, on, to', preposition 3.4.1.3, 4.3.1,
10.1,B11.4
contraction 5.3.2
with pronouns 5.4.2(b)
a(s) 'the; her, it, them'
as definite article 3.1, 3.2
as pronoun 5.1.2
a fim de que 'in order to', conjunction
9.2.4
accents 1.5, 8.2(a)
accusing 16.19
acola 'over there', adverb 8.1
action see instructing, inviting a course of
action, offering to do something,
requesting, suggesting a course of
action
address
forms of 5.1.1, B12.10
family B12.10.5
residence 12.12.4
titles B12.10.4
adjectives B4
agreement 4.4
comparative 4.3.1
degree B4.3
demonstrative 5.3.4
gender 4.1
indefinite 5.6
number 4.2
position 4.5, 8.4, 11.12.2, 11.12.3,
11.12.4, 11.12.5
possessive B3.2.5, B5.2, B5.2.1
special forms B4.3.3
suffixes 4.3.2.2.1
superlative 4.3.2
adverbs 4.3.1, 8
comparative 8.5.1
degree 4.3.2.2.2, 8.5
in -mente 8.2
as interrogatives 5.5.6, 8.1(i)
position 5.1.2.2(d), 5.1.3.2, 8.4,
11.12.1(c), 11.12.5
special forms 8.5.1
superlative 8.5.2
advice see asking for
affirmative 11.8
agglutination 2.5.1.2
agreement
of adjectives 4.4
in passive voice 7.9
of pronouns 5.4.4, 5.4.5, 5.6 note 1
see also enquiring about, expressing
ai 'there', adverb 8.1
ainda 'even, still'
as adverb 4.3.1, 5.1.2.2(d), 11.9
as conjunction 9.2.2
ainda que 'even if/though' 9.2.2
alem 'yonder', adverb 8.1
algo 'something', pronoun 5.6
alguem 'someone', pronoun 5.6
all 'over there', adverb 8.1(b) note
ante 'before', preposition 10.1
antes 'before', adverb 8.1(a)
antes que 'before', conjunction 9.2.5
Index
56
ao 'when, on' 7.5.3
aonde 'where to', pronoun 5.4.3
apenas 'just; as soon as'
as adverb 8.1(h)
as conjunction 9.2.5
apesar de 'in spite of, conjunction 9.2.2
apologizing B16.14
apos 'after', preposition 10.1
appreciation see expressing
approval see enquiring about, expressing
aquele(s), aquela(s) 'that, those'
demonstrative 5.3
aqui 'here' adverb 8.1(b), 12.4.1
aquilo 'that' demonstrative 5.3.1
aquilo 'to that' 5.3.3
arts 2.1.2.1
articles B3
contraction 3.4, 3.8
definite 3.1, 3.2, 3.3
indefinite 3.5, 3.6
omission 3.3, 3.7
use of B3.2, 3.6
asking for
advice 14.5
assistance B14.8
clarification B15.6
information B13.3
the time 13.3.1
assim 'thus'
as adverb 8.1(c)
as conjunction 9.1.4
assim como 'as well as', conjunction 9.2.6
assim que 'as soon as', conjunction
7.3.5.1,7.3.6.1,9.2.5
assistance see requesting
assumptions (correcting) 13.6
ate 'until' 10.1
attention (attracting) B12.4
attitudes (intellectual) see enquiring
about, expressing
augmentatives B2.4
auxiliary verbs see verbs
bastante 'enough, quite a lot'
as modifier 4.5.1.2, 5.1.2.2(d)
indefinite pronoun 5.6
bem 'well, quite', adverb 4.3.1, 8.1(c),
8.5.1, 12.4.1
bem como 'as well as', conjunction 9.2.6
ca 'here', adverb 8.1
cada 'each', indefinite pronoun or
adjective 5.6
capability see enquiring about, expressing
capes, names of 2.1.1.1
cars, names of 2.1.1.1
caso 'if 9.2.3
certainty see stating
ao certo 'exactly', adverb 8.3
certo(s), certa(s) 'certain', indefinite
adjective 5.6
cinema, 18.3.3
cities, omission of definite article 3.3.4
clarification see requesting
collective see nouns, numerals
com 'with', preposition 10.1
with pronouns 5.1.5.2, 5.4.2(b)
comigo 'with me' 5.1.5.2
command 7.3(a)
como 'how; as'
as adverb 7.3.5.1, 5.5.6(a), 8.1(i)
as conjunction 5.1.2.2(c), 9.2.1, 9.2.6
como se 'as if, conjunction 9.2.6
comparative see adjectives, adverbs
Conditional 7.1, 7.2.8, 7.2.9, 7.3.3.1(c)
with pronouns B5.1.2.3, 7.2.9.2,
B7.12.1.2, 11.12.1
replacing 7.2.3.1(f), 7.2.8.1(c)
conforme 'according to' preposition 10.1
congratulations 12.7
conjugation
Conditional 7.2.8.2, 7.2.9.2
Future 7.2.6.2, 7.2.7.2
Future Perfect Subjunctive 7.3.6.2
Future Subjunctive 7.3.5.2
groups 7.1
Imperative B7.4.1
Imperfect 7.2.3.2
Infinitive, Impersonal 7.5.1
Infinitive, Personal 7.5.2
Past Perfect Indicative 7.2.5.2
Past Perfect Subjunctive 7.3.4.2
Past Subjunctive 7.3.3.2
Pluperfect 7.2.5.2
Present Indicative 7.2.1.2
Present Perfect Indicative 7.2.2.2
Present Subjunctive 7.3.1.2
Present Perfect Subjunctive 7.3.2.2
Preterite 7.2.4.2
reflexive verbs B7.12
with vocalic change 7.13
conjunctions 5.1.2.2(c), 9
co-ordinating 5.1.2.1(d), 9.1
e with numerals 6.3
subordinating 9.2
position 9.1.4, 9.2.8
with verbs 9.2.3, 9.2.4
consigo 'with you' 5.1.5.2
consoante 'according to', preposition 10.1
consonants B1.2
contigo 'with you' 5.1.5.2
continents 3.2.3
contra 'against', preposition 10.1
with pronouns 5.4.2(b)
contraction
of articles 3.4, 3.8
of prepositions 3.4.1, 10.3
of pronouns 5.1.4, 5.3.2, 5.3.3
contudo 'however, nevertheless',
conjunction 5.1.2.1(d), 9.1.2
correcting assumptions see assumptions
countries 3.2.3
daquele(s), daquela(s) 'of that/those' 5.3.2
dates B13.5.1
days of the week 2.1.2.1
de 'in, 's, of, from', preposition 10.1
contraction 3.4.1.1, 3.8.1.2, 5.3.2
with pronouns 5.1.5.1, 5.1.5.2, B5.2.1
de . . . a 'from ... to' 11.5
defective see verbs
degree see adjectives, adverbs
demasiado 'too much, excessively', adverb
8.1(d), 8.3
demonstratives see adjectives, pronouns
depois 'after', adverb 8.1(a)
depois que 'after', conjunction 9.2.5
describing see reporting
desde 'from', conjunction 10.1
desde ... ate 'from ... to' 11.5
desde que 'provided that; since' 9.2.3,
9.2.5
desire see enquiring about, expressing
desse(s), dessa(s) 'of that/those' 5.3.2
deste(s), desta(s) 'of this/these' 5.3.2
diminutives B2.4
diphthongs B1.3
nasal Bl.3.2, 5.1.2.4(c)
oral 1.3.1, 5.1.2.4(a)
direct speech see speech
disagreement see enquiring about,
expressing
disappointment see expressing
disapproval see enquiring about,
expressing
disinterest see enquiring about,
expressing
dislike see enquiring about, expressing
displeasure see enquiring about,
expressing
dissatisfaction see enquiring about,
expressing
disto 'of this' 5.3.3
donde 'from where/which' 5.4.3
doubt 7.3(c)
durante 'during', preposition 10.1
e 'and', conjunction 5.1.2.1(d), 9.1, 9.1.1
with numerals 6.3
ele(s)/ela(s) 'he, she/them'
as subject pronoun 5.1.1
as prepositional pronoun 5.1.5
em 'on, at, about, of, in', preposition
3.4.1.2, 10.1
contraction 3.8.1.1, 5.3.2
with pronouns 5.1.5.1, 5.1.5.2
embora 'although', conjunction 9.2.2
enquanto 'while', conjunction 7.3.5.1,
9.2.5
enquiring about
agreement 15.1
approval 16.15
capability 16.20
desire 14.12
disagreement 15.1
disapproval 16.15
disinterest 16.4
dislike 16.3
displeasure 16.3
dissatisfaction 16.7
fear 16.9
incapability 16.20
intellectual attitudes B15
intention 14.12
interest 16.4
impossibility 15.4
knowledge 15.2
liking 16.3
logical conclusion 15.5
memory 15.3
need 14.11
obligation 14.9
pleasure 16.3
possibility 15.4
preference 16.10
satisfaction 16.7
someone 15.2
something 15.2
want 14.12
worry 16.9
entre 'between, among(st)', preposition
10.1
with pronouns 5.4.2(b)
esse(s), essa(s) 'that, those', demonstrative
5.3
estar 'to be' 11.13
este(s), esta(s) 'this, these', demonstrative
5.3
eu T, subject pronoun 5.1.1
evaluation B16
exchanging information 13
excepto 'except(ing)', preposition 10.1
with pronouns 5.4.2(b)
excepto se 'unless', conjunction 9.2.3
expressing
agreement 15.1
appreciation 16.16
approval 16.15
capability 16.20
command 7.3(c)
desire 14.12
disagreement 15.1
disappointment 16.8
disapproval 16.15
disinterest 16.4
dislike 16.2
displeasure 16.2
dissatisfaction 16.7
doubt 7.3(e)
fear 16.9
feeling 7.3(b)
gratitude 16.11
happiness 16.13
hope 16.6
incapability 16.20
incomprehension B15.6
indifference 16.18
intellectual attitudes 15
intention 14.12
interest 16.4
liking 16.1
need 7.3(f), 14.11
pleasure 16.1
preference 16.10
regret 16.17
satisfaction 16.7
surprise Bl 6.5
sympathy 16.12
uncertainty 7.3(e)
unhappiness 16.13
want 14.12
wish 7.3(a)
worry 16.9
family forms of address B12.10.5
farewell B12.2, 12.3
fear see enquiring about, expressing
feeling 7.3(b)
feminine
forming 2.2
of adjectives 4.1
of nouns 2.1.2, 2.1.4
Future
Indicative 7.1, 7.2.6, 7.2.7
with pronouns 5.1.2.3, 7.2.9.2,
B7.12.1.3, 11.12.1
replacing 7.2.6.1 note
Subjunctive 7.1, 7.3.5, 7.3.6, 7.5.2
note
gender
agreement 4.4.1, 7.9
of nouns 2.1, 2.2
of adjectives 4.1
gente 'people' Bll.l
a gente 'us' Bll.l
giving permission see permission
gratitude see expressing
greetings 12.1, 12.2, 12.3, 12.5, 12.6,
12.11
happiness see expressing
health 12.11
help 12.4.3
hope see expressing
identifying
people 13.1
places 12.12.1
things 13.2
Imperative 7.1, B7.4, 7.13 see also
requesting action
Imperfect 7.1, 7.2.3, 7.3.3.1(a), 7.3.3.1(c)
in reported speech see speech
impersonal verbs see verbs
impossibility see enquiring about, stating
incapability see enquiring about,
expressing
incomprehension see expressing
Indicative 7.1, 7.2
with vocalic change 7.13
indifference see expressing
Infinitive 7.1, 7.5
compound 7.7
with conjunctions 9.2.3
Impersonal 7.5.1
Personal 7.5.2
of reflexive verbs 7.12.2
use of see impossibility, possibility
information
asking for B 13. 3
exchanging B13
instructing 14.7
intention see enquiring about,
expressing
interest see enquiring about,
expressing
interrogatives 5.1.2.2(b), 5.5
with e que 5.5.5
word order 7.12.1
introductions 12.9
inviting a course of action 14.4
islands 3.2.3
isso 'that', demonstrative 5.3.1
isto 'that', demonstrative 5.3.1
ja 'already', adverb 8.1(a), 11.9
jamais 'never ever', adverb 5.1.2.2(a),
8.1(f), 11.8
judgement B16
juxtaposition 2.5.1.1
knowledge see enquiring about, stating
la 'over there', adverb 8.1
lakes 2.1.1.1
leave-taking B12.2, 12.3
letters 2.1.1.1
letter writing B13.5
closing formulas 12.2.1.1 note 1
dates B13.5.1
opening formulas B13.5.2
lhe(s) 'to him/her/them', pronoun indirect
object 5.1.3
liking see enquiring about, expressing
literature, 18.3.1
locations 12.12
logical conclusion see enquiring about
stating
logo 'therefore, so', conjunction 9.1.4
logo que 'as soon as' 7.3.5.1, 7.3.6.1,
9.2.5
mais 'more', adverb 8.5.1
mais . . . (do) que 'more . . . than'
with adjectives 4.3.1
with adverbs 8.5.1
o(s)/as mais . . . de/que 'the most . . .
in/that' 4.3.2.1
mal 'badly; as soon as, hardly'
as adverb 8.1(c), 8.5.1
as conjunction 9.2.5
mas 'but', conjunction 5.1.2.1(d), 9.1,
9.1.2
masculine
of adjectives 4.1.1, 4.1.2
of nouns 2.1.1, 2.1.3
me 'me', pronoun
as indirect object 5.1.3
as direct object 5.1.2
as reflexive 5.1.6
melhor 'better'
as adjective 4.3.3
as adverb 8.3, 8.5.1
memory see enquiring about, stating
menos 'less', adverb 8.5.1
menos . . . (do) que 'less . . . than'
with adjectives 4.3.1
with adverbs 8.5.1
a menos que 'provided that', conjunction
9.2.3
o(s)/a(s) menos . . . de/que 'the least
. . . in/that' 4.3.2.1
pelo menos 'at least', adverb 8.3
mesmo que 'even if/though', conjunction
9.2.2
meu(s), minha(s) 'my, mine', possessive
5.2
mim 'me', prepositional pronoun
5.1.5
modifiers 4.5.1.2, 5.1.2.2(d)
mood 7.1
Imperative 7.1, B7.4
Indicative 7.1, 7.2
Subjunctive 7.1, 7.3
mountains 2.1.1.1
muito 'much, very', adverb 8.1(d), 8.3,
8.5.1
with adjectives 4.3.1, 4.3.2.2.2, 4.5.
1.2
with pronouns 5.1.2.2(d)
muito(s), muita(s) 'many', pronoun or
adjective 5.6
music 18.3.2
nada 'nothing', pronoun 5.6
nao 'no, not', adverb 5.1.2.2(a), 8.1(f),
11.8
nao so . . . mas tambem 'not only . . . but
also', conjunction 9.1.1
narrating see reporting
naquele(s), naquela(s) 'on/in/about that/
those' 5.3.2
necessity 7.3(d)
need 7.3(f), 14.11
negative 11.8
word order 5.1.2.2(a), B5. 1.2.3,
5.1.3.2,5.1.6.1,7.12.1.1,8.4.3,
11.8, 11.12.1(a)
nem 'neither, nor', adverb 5.1.2.2(a),
8.1(f)
nem . . . nem 'neither . . . nor',
conjunction
copulative 9.1.1
disjunctive 9.1.3
nem que 'not even if, conjunction 9.2.2
nenhum(ns)/a(s) 'none', adjective or
pronoun 5.1.2.2(a), 5.6
neste(s), nesta(s) 'on/about this/these'
5.3.2
ninguem 'no one', pronoun 5.1.2.2(a),
5.6
nisso 'on/in/about that' 5.3.3
nos 'us', pronoun
as direct object 5.1.2
as indirect object 5.1.3
as reflexive B5.1.6
nos 'we', pronoun
as subject 5.1.1
as prepositional pronoun 5.1.5
nosso(s), nossa(s) 'our, ours', possessive
5.2
nouns B2
abstract 2.1.4
agglutination 2.5.1.2
collective 2.6
compound 2.5
concrete 2.1.3
gender 2.1, 2.2
juxtaposition of 2.5.1.1
number 2.3
number
agreement 4.4.1, 7.9
of adjectives 4.2
of nouns 2.3
numerals B6
cardinal 2.1.1.1, B6.1
collective 6.2
multiplicative B6.1
ordinal 2.1.1.1, B6.1
Roman 6.4
nunca 'never', adverb 5.1.2.2(a), 8.1(f),
11.8
nunca mais 'never again' 8.3
Index
60
o(s) 'the; him, it, them'
as definite article 3.1, 3.2
as pronoun 5.1.2
obligation see enquiring about, stating
occupation 13.1 A
oceans 2.1.1.1
offering to do something 14.2
onde 'where, in which'
as adverb 8.1(b)
as pronoun 5.4.3
onde? 'where?' 5.1.2.2(b), 5.5.6(b), 8.1(i)
origin 12.12.3
ou, ou ... ou 'or, either . . . or',
conjunction 9.1.3
ownership 13.1.3
para 'for, to', preposition 7.5.3, 10.1,
11.3, B11.4
with pronouns 5.1.5.1, 5.4.2(b)
para que 'for, in order to', conjunction
7.5.4, 9.2.4
Participle
Past 7.1, 7.8
Present 7.1, B7.6, 7.7
Passive Voice 7.9
Past
Indicative mood 7.1, 7.2.3, 7.2.4, 7.2.5
Participle 7.1, 7.8, 7.9
reported speech see speech
Subjunctive mood 7.1, 7.3.3
perante 'before', preposition 10.1
with pronouns 5.4.2(b)
Perfect tenses
Indicative mood 7.1, 7.2.2, 7.2.7, 7.2.9
Past 7.2.5
Present 7.2.2
Subjunctive mood 7.1, 7.3.2, 7.3.6
permission (seeking, giving, refusing)
14.10
pior 'worse'
as adjective 4.3.3
as adverb 8.3, 8.5.1
places 12.12
pleasure see enquiring about, expressing
Pluperfect 7.1, 7.2.5
plural
of adjectives 4.2
of compound nouns 2.5.2
of nouns 2.3
pois 'because', conjunction 9.2.1
por 'for; along, through; by', preposition
10.1,11.3
contraction 3.4.1.4
with pronouns 5.1.5.1, 5.4.2(b)
with Passive Voice 7.9
porem 'however', conjunction 5.1.2.1(d),
9.1.2
porque 'because', conjunction 9.2.1
porque? 'why?', adverb 5.5.6(c), 8.1(i)
portanto 'therefore, so', conjunction
9.1.4
Portuguese language
cultural language 18.3
international language 18.1
official language 18.1.1
origins 18.2
variants 18.1.2
position
of adjectives 4.5
of adverbs 8.4
of conjunctions 9.2.8
of pronouns 5.1.2.1, 5.1.2.2, 5.1.2.3,
5.1.3.1,5.1.3.2, 5.6 notes 1-2,
7.2.9.2, B7.12, 11.12.1
possibility see enquiring about, stating
pouco 'little, hardly', adverb 4.5.1.2,
5.1.2.2(d), 8.1(d), 8.3, 8.5.1
pouco(s), pouca(s) 'few' adjective or
pronoun 5.6
preference see enquiring about, expressing
prepositions 4.3.1, B10, 10.1
contraction of 3.4, 3.8.1, 5.3.2, 5.3.3,
10.3
following verbs B10.4
with means of transport 11.11
prepositional phrases 10.2
with pronouns 5.1.5.1, 5.1.5.2, 5.4.2(b)
with time 11.10
Present
Indicative 7.1, 7.2.1
Participle 7.1, B7.6
Perfect 7.2.2
Subjunctive 7.1, 7.3.1, 7.3.2, 7.13
in direct speech see speech
Preterite 7.2.4, 7.3.3.1(b)
in direct speech see verbs
professions 2.1.1, 2.1.2
pronouns 5
agreement of 5.2.3, 5.3.4, 5.4.4, 5.4.5,
5.6 notes 1-2
contraction of 5.1.4, 5.3.2, 5.3.3
demonstrative 5.3
direct object B5.1.2, 5.1.2.4
indefinite 5.6
indirect object B5.1.3
interrogative 5.5
neuter 5.3.1, 5.3.3
omission B5. 1.1.1, 5.2.4, 5.4.1
personal B5.1
position of B5. 1.2.1, 5.1.2.2, 5.1.2.3,
5.1.3.1,5.1.3.2,5.1.4,5.1.6.1,
7.12.1, 11.12.1, 11.12.2, 11.12.3,
11.12.6
possessive 3.3.3, B5.2, B5.2.2
prepositional B5.1.5
with prepositions 5.1.5, 5.3.2, 5.3.3,
5.4.2(b)
relative 5.4
reflexive B5.1.6, 7.12.1
subject B5.1.1
pronunciation Bl
proximo 'next' 11.6
qual, quais 'who, whom, which, that',
pronoun 5.4.4
qual?, quais? 'which?' 5.1.2.2(b), 5.5.3
quando 'when', conjunction 7.3.5.1,
7.3.6.1,9.2.5
quando? 'when?' 5.1.2.2(b)
quanto 'how much', adverb 8.1(d)
quanto(s), quanta(s) 'all that/who',
pronoun 5.4.6
quanto(s)?, quanta(s)? 'how many?' 5.5.4
quase 'almost', adverb 8.1(d)
que 'than; that; whom, which, that, the
one that/who'
in comparatives 4.3.1
as conjunction 5.1.2.2(c), 9.2.1, 9.2.6
as pronoun 5.4.1
que? 'what?, which?' 5.5.1
que nem 'as' conjunction 9.2.6
... do que '. . . than', conjunction 9.2.6
quern 'who, whom, those', pronoun 5.4.2
quern? 'who?' 5.1.2.2(b), 5.5.2
quer . . . quer 'whether ... or',
conjunction 9.1.3
reflexive verbs 7.12
refusing see permission
regret see expressing
relative clauses 5.1.6.1
remembering 15.3
reporting 13.4 see also letter writing
reported speech see speech
requesting
action 14.3
assistance B14.8
clarification B15.6
residence 12.12.4
rivers 2.1.1.1, 3.2.3
salvo 'excepting', preposition with
pronouns 5.4.2(b)
salvo se 'unless', conjunction 9.2.3
satisfaction see enquiring about,
expressing
sciences 2.1.2.1
se 'if; oneself, themselves'
as conjunction 7.3.5.1, 7.3.6.1, 9.2.3,
9.2.8
as pronoun B5.1.6, 5.1.6.2
seas 2.1.1.1
seasons 2.1.1.1
seeking permission see permission
seguinte 'following' 11.6
segundo 'according to', preposition with
pronouns 5.4.2(b)
sem 'without', preposition 10.1
sem duvida 'doubtlessly', adverb 8.3
sem que 'without', conjunction 7.5.4
sempre 'always', adverb 5.1.2.2(d), 8.1(a)
sempre que 'whenever', conjunction 9.2.5
ser 'to be' 11.13
senhor(es)/a(s) 'you'
as subject pronoun 5.1.1
as prepositional pronoun 5.1.5
seu(s), sua(s) 'his, hers, theirs', possessive
5.2
si 'you', prepositional pronoun 5.1.5
sim 'yes', adverb 8.1(g)
so 'only', adverb 8.1(h)
sob 'under', preposition 10.1
with pronouns 5.4.2(b)
sobre 'on, about, over', preposition 10.1
with pronouns 5.1.5.1, 5.4.2(b)
socializing B12
somente 'only', adverb 8.1(h)
speech
direct 13.4.1, 13.4.1.1
reported 13.4.1.1
spelling Bl
stating
certainty 15.7
impossibility 15.4
knowledge 15.2
logical conclusion 15.5
memory 15.3
obligation 14.9
possibility 15.4
uncertainty 15.7
Subjunctive 7.3
with conjunctions 9.2.3, 9.2.4
in direct speech see speech
replacing 7.5.4
use of see advice, hope, impossibility,
instructing, requesting, offering (to
do), possibility, warning
vocalic change 7.13
suffixes
with adjectives 4.3.2.2
with adverbs 8.2
augmentative 2.4.4
diminutive 2.4.2, 2.4.3
suggesting a course of action 14.1
stress 1.4
superlative
absolute 4.3.2.2
of adjectives 4.3.2
of adverbs 8.5.2
special forms B4.3.3
surprise see expressing
sympathy see expressing
tal, tais 'such', indefinite pronoun 5.6
tal que 'in such a way that', conjunction
9.2.7
de tal maneira/modo que 'in such a way
that' 9.2.7
talvez 'perhaps', adverb 5.1.2.2(d), 8.1(e)
tambem 'also', adverb 5.1.2.2(d)
tanto 'so much', adverb 11.7
tanto . . . como 'both . . . and',
conjunction 9.1.1
tanto quanto 'as much/far as', conjunction
9.2.6
tanto que 'in such a way that',
conjunction 9.2.7
tao 'so' 11.7
tao . . . como 'as . . . as'
with adjectives 4.3.1
with adverbs 8.5.1
te 'you; to you; yourself, pronoun
as direct object 5.1.2
as indirect object 5.1.3
as reflexive B5.1.6
teu(s), tua(s) 'your, yours', possessive 5.2
ti 'you', prepositional pronoun 5.1.5
time 13.3.1, 13.3.2
titles B12.10.4
todavia 'nevertheless, yet', conjunction
5.1.2.1(d), 9.1.2
todo(s), toda(s) 'all, the whole of, adverb
or pronoun 5.1.2.2(d), 5.1.2.2(e),
11.2
towns 3.3.4
tu 'you', subject pronoun 5.1.1
tudo 'everything', adjective or pronoun
5.1.2.2(d), 5.4.6, 5.6, 11.2
um(ns)/uma(s) 'a(n), some' indefinite
article 3.5, 3.6
'a pair, about, such' 3.6.4
contraction 3.8
um ao outro 'one another' 7.12.1.4
uncertainty see expressing, see also stating
unhappiness see expressing
unipersonal see verbs
vario(s), varia(s) 'various', indefinite
pronoun 5.6
verbs B7
auxiliary 7.10
conjugation groups 7.1
with conjunctions 9.2.3, 9.2.4
consonant change 7.2.1.2
defective 7.11
Future tenses 7.2.6, 7.2.7, 7.2.8, 7.2.9,
7.3.5, 7.3.6
Indicative 7.1, 7.2
Imperative 7.4
impersonal 7.11
Infinitive 7.5
mood 7.1, 7.2, 7.3, B7.4
Participle 7.6, 7.7, 7.8
Passive voice 7.9
Past tenses 7.2.3, 7.2.4, 7.2.5, 7.3.3,
7.3.4
Perfect tenses 7.2.2, 7.2.5, 7.3.2,
7.3.4
Present tenses 7.1, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.3.2
reflexive B7.12
in reported speech see speech
Subjunctive 7.3
tense 7.1
unipersonal 7.11
with vocalic change 7.13
with preposition B10.4
visto que 'seeing that', conjunction 9.2.1
voce(s) 'you'
as subject pronoun 5.1.1
as prepositional pronoun 5.1.5
vos 'you; to you', pronoun
as direct object 5.1.2
as indirect object B5.1.3
as reflexive B5.1.6
vos 'you'
as subject pronoun 5.1.1
as prepositional pronoun 5.1.5
vosso(s), vossa(s) 'your, yours', possessive
B5.2
vowels Bl.l
nasal 1.1.2
oral Bl. 1.1
want see enquiring about, expressing
warning 12.4.2, 14.6
weather B12.13
welcome 12.1.2
'whatever' 7.3.5.1
'whenever' 7.3.5.1
'wherever' 7.3.5.1
'whoever' 7.3.5.1
wines 2.1.1.1
wishes (good) 12.8
wishing 7.3(a)
word order B11.12, B13.3, 13.4.1, B14.8
see position: of adjectives, of adverbs,
of conjunctions, of pronouns; see also
negative and speech
worry see enquiring, expressing
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11